shop practices - Salomon Certification

Transcription

shop practices - Salomon Certification
SHOP PRACTICES
& SPARE PARTS
10/11
SPM 11 EN.indb 1
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Contents
2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual
Binding1
Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification
4
Binding Quick Reference Chart
6
Retail Binding
Systems7
Preparation
Installation
7
8
Binding-to-Boot Adjustments
14
Release Value Selection & Adjustment
15
Final Checking & Visual Inspection
17
Mechanical Inspection
18
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 20
Rental & DEMO Binding Systems
22
Preparation
22
Installation
23
Binding-to-Boot AdJustments
24
Release Value Selection & Adjustment
25
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection
25
The 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is published
by Salomon for Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding
Dealers. This manual provides current technical
information, certification requirements, and indemnification information. Please keep a copy of this
Manual on hand as a quick, easy, and reliable reference for servicing Salomon alpine bindings. Because
the content of the Manual changes every year, you
should keep previous editions available as references for servicing older products. Your Salomon
Certification Web site will one day provide a resource
of archived material for your reference as well.
Salomon continues to be the number one winter
sports brand worldwide. Our goal is to advance our
breakthrough technologies featuring innovation in
safety and performance binding systems.
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 29
Binding Maintenance
& Repair
Maintenance & Repair
32
32
Certification Program
Technician Certification Exam
34
34
ALPINE SKI
38
Technical Features
39
Maintenance & Repairs
43
Boot47
Standard Boot Norms
47
Technical Features
48
Salomon Foot Measurer
49
Advanced Fit Technology Liner
50
Custom Shell technology
52
Salomon Boot Technologies
54
Boot Concepts
55
Foot Anatomy And Fit
63
Helmet & Pole
66
Helmet Technology
67
Pole Technonolgy
69
Spare Parts
70
Warranty85
Cover Photo
Photographer: Scott Markewitz.
Skier: Rick Armstrong.
Rev. 01 - 101007
SPM 11 EN.indb 2
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Photo: Adam Clark. Skier: Cody Townsend
Technical reference for the
complete line of current
Salomon alpine bindings
SPM 11 EN.indb 1
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Introduction > 2
2010/2011 Certification program
Salomon provides its Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers with information contained in this publication:
1.To help assure skiers that Salomon alpine
bindings are properly selected, mounted,
adjusted, and serviced.
Authorized Alpine Dealer Requirements
While it is not necessary for an Authorized Location to have all of its
personnel certified, sales people and managers are encouraged to remain
aware of Salomon’s certification and record keeping requirements.
• Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers must have at least one
Salomon Certified Technician working at each Authorized Location selling, servicing or renting Salomon alpine bindings.
• The technician who signs the Authorized Location’s workshop or rental
form for any transaction must be currently Salomon alpine binding certified.
• It is an Authorized Dealer’s responsibility to maintain sufficient records
to identify its Certified Technicians.
2.To serve as a risk management tool for the
Authorized Dealer.
Certification Fees
Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers will be invoiced an administrative registration fee for technician certifications.
U.S. Dealers
• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for each Registration and Exam
submitted on line at www.salomoncertification.com
• The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/ Exam submitted by mail or
fax to Salomon, or for technicians certified by any approved industry
training program.
Fax: (801) 334-4502
Salomon Certification/Customer Service
Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave.
Ogden, UT 84401
Canadian Dealers
• For Canada, a $30.00 fee will be invoiced for each Certification Kit sent
to the dealer. Technicians must Register and take the Exam on-line at
www.salomonhookup.ca
2010/2011 Certification Kit
This manual forms part of a kit which is available each year to Salomon
Authorized Binding Dealers. Enclosed in the kit you will find the necessary materials to certify your shop technicians for mounting and adjusting
Salomon Bindings for the 2010/2011 season. This packet should have the
following items:
•2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices Manual & Spare Parts
•2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices CD (instructional video & manuals)
•Skier Classification Chart
•Visual Indicator Adjustment Chart
•Toe Height Adjustment Card
If this packet is missing any of these items, or you need any more, please
contact Salomon Customer Service at 1 (800) 654-2668 (in the U.S.) or
1 (800) 361-3398 (in Canada).
Electronic Documentation
An electronic version of the 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is
available both on the media CD included with this Certification Kit
as well as online at www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or
www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada). The media CD PDF version of the
manual is identical to the printed copy included in this kit, with the added
convenience of a fully hyperlinked table of contents and reference boxes
for easy navigation. The online PDF version of the Salomon Shop Practices
Manual is continuously updated with the most current technical language
and thus may have additions not appearing in the print version of the
Salomon SPM. The printed version of the Salomon SPM is still completely
valid and all procedures described within follow industry standards.
SPM 11 EN.indb 2
Media CD
The training video comes on a cross-platform CD-ROM
(Windows, Mac & Linux) along with a fully indexed PDF
of the Shop Practices Manual and several forms for
convenient access, duplication and printing.
To view the videos you’ll need a computer with
any web browser with the Quicktime plug-in
installed (if it is not already installed, your browser
will provide a link to easily obtain the free software).
In addition, to view the Shop Practices document and open the other forms
you’ll need a PDF document reader such as the free Adobe Reader (available at
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html)
Insert the CD into a computer, navigate to the top-level of the CD-ROM and double-click the “WELCOME-BIENVENUE.html” file – this should open the file in your
internet web browser. Alternately, with the disk in the computer, you can launch a
new internet browser window, choose “Open” from the “File” menu of the browser and navigating to location of the file on the CD-ROM.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Introduction > 3
2010/2011 Certification program continued
2010/2011 Salomon Certified Technician Certification Process
Only a technician sponsored by a Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer may be certified. Authorized Dealers can log onto
www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada) to receive a current list of their Salomon
Certified Technicians. To complete the technician certification process:
1.Read this manual and become familiar with required Salomon shop
practices. A corresponding CD is available to assist in this process. For
a copy of the CD, contact your Salomon sales or Customer Satisfaction
Representative.
2.Be familiar with earlier editions of Salomon Shop Practices Manuals
and Salomon Technical Updates.
3.Be familiar with Salomon bindings through hands-on experience.
4.For the U.S., log on to www.salomoncertification.com. For Canada,
log on to www.salomonhookup.ca. Complete the on-line 2010/2011
Salomon Certified Technician Registration and Exam and receive confirmation of your certification instantly.
Technician Certification Validity Period and Transfer
• Technician certification is valid for two years from the exam date
(unless Salomon provides further notice).
• Technician certification is not valid at a location that is not a
Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Location.
• Technician certification may be transferred from one
Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer to another by
contacting the certification coordinator by mail or telephone
(Ogden, UT for U.S. dealers and Markham for Canadian dealers).
Instructions For Taking The On-line Exam
Once you have become familiar with the procedures for mounting, adjusting, and testing Salomon bindings, take the exam on-line for instant results
and obtain your certificate immediately. (If for some reason you are unable to take the test on line, please contact your Salomon sales representative.)
Just follow these easy steps:
1. Log onto the certification website
•In the U.S. log onto www.salomoncertification.com
•In Canada log onto www.salomonhookup.ca
2. Register your information
•Once you have signed in, you will get a prompt asking you to confirm
your login-ID. Write this information down in case you need to stop
your test in the middle and return later.
3. Take the on-line exam
•Once the test begins, do not use your web browser to move “back”
or “forward”. Doing this will result in a cancelled session and you
will need to start at the beginning.
•A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass.
•In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and
must be answered correctly.
4. Once you pass the test
•In the U.S. click on the button to create a printable certificate. (The
certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do not have Acrobat
Reader on your computer, click on the icon, and you can download it
free from the web.) OR Write down your certificate number and return
later to retrieve your printable certificate. An invoice for $12 will be
generated and sent to your shop. If you do not pass, your shop will
not be invoiced. Only passing exams will receive certificate numbers
and generate an invoice.
•In Canada, click on the Download Certificate box to create a printable certificate. (The certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do
not have Acrobat Reader on your computer, click on the icon and you
can download it free from the web.) OR click on e-mail Certificate to
receive an e-mail version.
Finding Currently Certified Technicians For Your Shop
Finding currently certified technicians is a service only available the U.S.
1. Simply log onto the site and click on the button “Search for certified
technicians”.
2. Enter your shop ship-to code or certificate number to search the certification database.
SPM 11 EN.indb 3
3. You may retrieve printable certificates from the database for any certified tech.
4. If you need to know who in your shop is certified, log on and search
for certified technicians for your shop. An updated list will appear so
you have constant access to the information.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Indemnification > 4
Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification
Schedule of indemnified bindings
Salomon alpine binding indemnification applies to the 2010/2011 Retail Binding Line, 2010/2011 Rental
Binding Line, Non-current Retail Binding Line and Non-current Rental Binding Line models listed below.
Indemnification does not apply to older non-indemnified binding models.
Non-Indemnified Bindings
Older models of Salomon bindings no longer on the Schedule of Indemnified Bindings may still be serviced, however Liability Indemnification will not
be offered by Salomon for these models of bind­ings. Dealers wishing to service these models of bindings can reduce their liability risk by requiring an
additional waiver and release agreement and attaching it to the Workshop Form. Such waivers should be reviewed by a dealer’s own legal counsel to
ensure compliance with applicable laws.
Salomon bindings are not designed or tested for use with Mono Boards, therefore bindings mounted on Monoboards will not be indemnified.
Retail Binding Line
2010/2011
Non Current
STH 16
STH 16 Steel
STH 14 Driver
STH 14
STH 12 Oversized
STH 12 Driver
Z 14
Z 12
Z 12 Ti
Z 11
Z 10
Z 10 Ti
Z 10 Women
Z 10 Ti Women
L10
L10 Jr
L9
L7
T5
C610 Cp
C610
C609 Ti
C609 D+
C609
C608 FIS 17
C608 Cp
C608
C607
C509 Dr+
C509
C305 / C305 MINI
Z 920 Lab
Z 916 Lab
Z 914 Lab
N 920 Equipe Race
N 916 Equipe Comp.
S914 Axe+
S914 Lab
S914 FIS 26.3/20/17
S914 FIS
S914 Pe2
S914
S914 FIS Pilot
S914 Pilot
914 F1S 20
914 FIS
914
S912 Ti Pe2
S912 FIS
S912 FIS 24
S912 Ti
S912 Ps
S912 FIS Pilot
S912 Ti Pilot
S912 Ti SC Pilot
S912
S910 T FIS 26,3/24/20
S910 T Ps
S910 FIS 24
S910 T
S910
S910 T Ps
S910 T Axe+
S812 Pa
S811 PS
S810 Ti
S810 Ti Axe+
S810 Cp
S810 Ps
S810
S810 Ti Pilot
S810 Pilot
S810 Ti SC Pilot
S810 Ti Ps
S711 Ps
S711 Pa
S711 Cp
711
S710 Cp
S710 Ti
S710
S710 Pilot
S710 SC Pilot
S710 Ti Pilot
S710 Ti Cp2
S710 Pa
S710 DP
S710 CP2
710 Smartrak Grip
710
C610 CP2
610 CP
610
609 D+
609
S608 CP
C608 CP2
608
607
C509 D+
S305 GROM
C305 GROM
C305 MINI GROM
305
Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Control
STH 12
Z 10 Smartrak Control
Z 10 Ti Axe +
Z 10 Ti
Z 10 FIS 20
LZ 9
LZ 8
LZ 7
TZ 5
Q7 SC
Q7 SR
ST610 e2
C609 SC
609 SC
609 SR
C608 SR
C608 SC
608 SC
C607 SC
C607 SR
607 SR
Quadrax 6 SC
C509 SR
C509 SC
Q500 SC Drive Plus
Q500 SC
Q500 SR
Quadrax 5 SR
Q5 SR
Snowtrip ST 410
Q400 SR
C305 SR
305 SC
305 SR
S305 SC
S305 Grom SC
C305 Grom SR
Q300 SC
Q300 SR
S300 SC
Quadrax 3 SC
Quadrax 3 SR
Q3 SC
Q3 SR
KRR Z 12 Ti
KRR Z 12
Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Control
Z 12 Ti SC
KRR Z 10
Z 10 Ti SC
Z 10 Smartrak
LZ 8 SC
LZ 7 SR
KRR TZ 5 SC
TZ 5 SR
TZ 5 SC
TZ 5 SC Junior Track
Rental Binding Line
2010/2011
Non Current
KR Z 12
KR Z 11
KR Z 10
KR Z 10 W
Z 12 SC
Z 10 SC
L 10 SC
L 10 SR
L 9 W SC
L 7 SC
L 7 SR
T 5 SC
T 5 SR
S912 Ti SC
S810 Ti SC
712 e2
Cosmic S712 SC
KRR 711
711 SC
710 e2
710 SC
Cosmic S710 SR
Cosmic S710 SC
Cosmic S710
Q700 SC
S700 SR
S700 SC Drive Plus
S700 SC
SPM 11 EN.indb 4
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Indemnification > 5
Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification continued
Salomon Authorized Dealers
Salomon offers liability indemnification to Salomon Authorized Dealers. Salomon will to the extent and
within the limits that insurance coverage is available defend and indemnify a Salomon Authorized Alpine
Binding Dealer against liabilities from claims presented by any customer of the Authorized Dealer arising
solely from the use of Salomon alpine bindings, provided:
A.The dealer purchased the alpine bindings from Salomon.
B.The dealer has received written notice of a claim involving alpine bindings.
C.The claim alleges use of the alpine bindings resulted in injury.
D.All Salomon recommendations, procedures and policies in effect at the
time of the incident were followed, including, but not limited to, those
contained in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual, Salomon Technical
Update (if applicable), Salomon Purchaser Policies and Salomon
General Terms & Conditions.
E.The Certified Technician is of legal age.
F. The dealer uses workshop and/or rental forms the same as, or equivalent to, Salomon forms with currently approved Liability Release
Language.
G.The dealer maintains proper and complete records for all Salomon
bindings mounted and/or adjusted for a period of two years or the
statute of limitations of the state or province, whichever is longer.
H.The dealer provides written documentation of the ­technician’s employment and training (e.g., method of training, proof of certification, etc.).
I.A copy of the properly completed workshop form or rental form, including a signed release, is submitted.
J.A properly completed Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report,
the same as or equivalent to the exemplary form displayed in this
manual, is submitted.
K. Any other helpful information such as a Ski Patrol Incident Report
Form is submitted.
L.The dealer notifies Salomon in writing within ten days of the date on
which the dealer first receives written notice of the claim.
M.The dealer cooperates fully in the investigation, litigation and/or settlement of the claim.
Salomon may terminate indemnification, with respect to Salomon
alpine bindings, upon providing written notice to the dealer.
Legal Claims
In the event a Salomon equipment user or anyone acting upon the equipment user’s behalf contacts the
Authorized Dealer regarding a potential claim:
1. U
se your best efforts to determine the exact nature and details of the
claim.
2. Avoid expressing opinions concerning the claim. You may, to the
extent that you have complied with all ­recommended procedures,
indicate to the claimant or the claimant’s representative that recommended procedures for service and adjustment of the equipment were
followed.
3.Notify your insurance company. Salomon indemnification is not a substitute for liability insurance.
SPM 11 EN.indb 5
4.Gather all information and documents required by Salomon listed in
the Liability Indemnification section for that specific product and send
the documents with a brief description of the incident to:
U.S.A.
Alpine Legal Claims
Department,
Salomon U.S.A.,
2030 Lincoln Ave.,
Ogden, UT 84401.
Canada
Legal Claims Department
Salomon Canada Sports
2700 14th Ave Unit 1-4
Markham, On L3R 0J1
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
6
Binding Quick Reference Chart
Ti Line
High Lateral Transmission
Removable Brake
Ski/Binding Interface
Adult / Junior Norms
Micro Simultaneous
Automatic
Vertical Progressive Pivot
SCP (Salomon Control Pedal)
(E) Elastic pedal / (S) Stomp pedal
Wing
Adj.
Weight 1/2 pair (g)
US Size
Adj.
Range
(mm)
lbs
Height (mm)
DIN Scale
Drill Bit Length
3.6 mm diameter
(skis with no metal) (Ref. #)
kg
Skier Weight
Drill Bit Selection
4.1 mm diameter
(skis with metal) (Ref. #)
80 mm - 123  mm (Ref. #)
70 mm - 116 mm (Ref. #)
56 mm - 99 mm (Ref. #)
Brakes
Jig Selecion
(given ski width)
RETAIL
À La Carte Models
N STH16
102972 R90/R100/R115/R130
9.5
9-16 17.5
> 95
19 2.5 1161 S
S
A
•
•
N STH14 Driver
110723
9.5
6-14 17.5
58-130
127-286 19 2.5 1060 S
S
A
•
•
N STH14
102975 R90/R100/R115/R130
9.5
6-14 17.5
58-130
127-286 19 2.5 1025
A V
S
A
•
•
9.5
4-12 17.5
42-120
92-264 19 2.5 1025
A V
S
A
•
•
9.5
3-10 16.5
30-107
66-235 28 3.5 860
A
E
A
9.5
2,5-9 16.5
25-100
55-220 28 3.5 861
A
E
A
9.5
6-14 16.5
58-130
127-286 28 3.5 1050
A V
•
A
•
•
9.5
4-12 16.5
42-120
94-264 28 3.5 1050
A V
•
A
•
•
9.5
4-12 16.5
42-120
92-264 28 3.5 937
A V
•
A
Ti •
•
Drill Bit Ref. # 000892
Drill Bit Ref. # 000893
Jig Ref. # 001157
R80/R90/R100/R115
Jig Ref. # 001156
N STH12 Oversized 110601
R90/R100/R115
> 209
N L10
110604
B80
N L9
108044
B80
•
N Z14
110583
B75/B80
N Z12
110599
B80/B90/B100
N Z12 Ti
110453
B80/B90/B100
N Z11
110602
B80/B90
9.5
3,5-11 16.5
36-115
79-253 28 3.5 970
A V
•
A
•
•
N Z10
110603
B80/B90
9.5
3-10 16.5
30-107
66-235 28 3.5 970
A V
•
A
•
•
N Z10 Ti W
892976
B80/B90
9.5
3-10 16.5
30-107
66-235 28 3.5 857
A V
•
A
Ti •
•
8.0
2-7,5 16.5
22-85
55-187 28 3.5 861
A
E A&J
8.0
0,5-4,5 14
10-45max 22-100 44 5.5 561
A
E A&J
8.0
0,5-4,5 22
10-45max 22-100 104 13 681
A
E A&J
B75
9.5
6-14 23
58-130
127-286 100 15 1370
A V
•
A
Smartrak
•
•
B75/B80/B90
9.5
4-12 31.5
42-120
92-264 120 15 1310
A V
•
A
Smartrak
•
•
9.5
3,5-11 16.5
36-115
79-253 120 3.5 1305
A V
•
A
Smartrak
•
•
9.5
3,5-11 16.5
36-115
79-253 120 3.5 1157
A V
•
A
Smartrak
•
•
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 120 15 1305
A V
•
A
Smartrak
•
•
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 120 15 1030
A V
•
A
Smartrak
Ti •
•
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 120 15 950
A
E
A
•
9.5
2,5-9 31.5
25-100
55-220 120 15 950
A
E
A
•
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 80 10 950
A
E
A
•
•
111617 / 111623
B80
001156
N T5
111639 / 111619
NS
784061
111641
NS
247290
N T5 Juniortrack
001157
# 000814
N L7
# 000813
Junior
•
•
Junior Track
•
110671
B80
J Z11
120026
B75
K Z10
110672 / 110673
B80
K Z10 Ti
102174 / 110677
B80
110674
B80
102192 / 104442
B80
111300
B80
J L10
J L9
J L10 Jr
# 000892
K Z11
# 000893
108772 / 108785
001157
120025
K Z12
001156
K Z14
# 788403
Bindings For Sets
RENTAL
Smartrak Rental
KR Z12
110605
B80/B90
9.5
4-12 31.5
42-120
92-264 120 15 1310
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
KR Z11
110606
B80/B90
9.5
3,5-11 31.5
36-115
79-253 120 15 1305
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
KR Z10
110607
B80
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 120 15 1305
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
KR Z10 W
110608
B80
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 120 15 1305
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 122 15 860
A
E
A
Synchro-Center
•
8.0
2-7,5 31.5
22-85
55-187 122 15 860
A
E A&J Synchro-Center
•
8.0
0,5-4,5 14
10-45max 22-100 56
572
A
E A&J Synchro-Rental
•
8.0
0,5-4,5 28
10-45max 22-100 86 11 810
A
E A&J Synchro-Center
•
Bindings For Sets
000893 000892
FR T5 SR
111622
NS
FR T5 SC
111640
NS
NR Z12 SC
110609
B80/B90/B100/B115
9.5
4-12 31.5
42-120
92-264 122 15 1386
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
NR Z10 SC
110610
B80/B90
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 122 15 1370
A V
•
A
Synchro-Center
•
•
NR L10 SC
110612
B80
9.5
3-10 31.5
30-107
66-235 122 15 1100
A
E
A
Synchro-Center
•
NR L10 SR
110613
B80
9.5
3-10 18
30-107
66-235 80 10 952
A
E
A
Synchro-Rental
•
NR L9 W SC
107279
B80
9.5
2,5-9 31.5
25-100
55_220 122 15 861
A
E
A
Synchro-Center
•
NR L7 SC
111812
B80
8.0
2-7,5 31.5
22-85
55-187 122 15 1100
A
E A&J Synchro-Center
•
NR L7 SR
111618
B80
8.0
2-7,5 18
22-85max 55-187 80 10 958
A
E A&J Synchro-Rental
•
NR T5 SR
111642
NS
8.0
0,5-4,5
14
10-45max 22-100 56
572
A
E A&J Synchro-Rental
•
NR T5 SC
111643
NS
8.0
0,5-4,5 28
10-45max 22-100 86 11 810
A
E A&J Synchro-Center
•
# 000814
B80
# 000813
B80
111813
# 001040
110676
FR L7 SC
# 001003
FR L10 SC
7
# 000892
# 000893
# 001040
# 001003
Adult
SPM 11 EN.indb 6
001003
# 000814
# 000813
# 001040
# 001003
Junior
7
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Binding
Systems
Retail systems > 7
Photo: Dan Carr. Skier: Sammy Carlson.
Proper procedures for
a Salomon Certified
Technician to follow
while mounting and
adjusting Salomon
Retail bindings.
Start out prepared with an efficient working area. Your bench should be the right height, with proper lighting, and with the necessary tools at hand. Familiarize yourself with all procedures before you start: being
prepared is the best way to avoid errors and costly mistakes. It is important that all components match
those listed on the workshop form. Refer to your workshop form and make sure the bindings are appropriate for the skier. If the bindings have been used, make sure they are in good condition and no parts are
missing, broken, or showing signs of wear.
S TEP 1
Preparation
Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Before drilling the ski, be sure the
boot you are using is compatible with
the binding. Only boots that conform
with applicable standards may be
used with Salomon bindings. (See
Standard Boot Sole Dimensions
on page 47 for reference). If a boot
sole is warped, worn or improp­erly
canted, such that there is more than
a 1 mm difference in sole flatness
measured across its width, the boot
is incompatible.
Other Compatibility Problems You
May Encounter
• Cut-outs in the boot sole that
prevent the brake from engaging
properly.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
18
47
Clean vs. Lubricated Test
Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
SPM 11 EN.indb 7
• E xcessive ramping or wear of the
boot sole at the point where it
contacts the binding. Any wear that
inhibits binding function is excessive.
• Tread, grid pattern or insignia
present in the AFD area of the boot
sole. This area must be flat over its
entire surface.
• Non-compatible boot sole composition. Low-grade thermoplastic
(T.P.) boots may not be used with
Salomon bindings. If you are uncertain as to the quality of the boot
sole material, perform the Clean
vs. Lubricated Test as described
on page 19.
Only adult norm boots may be used
with adult bindings. Under no circumstances should a junior norm
boot ever be used with an adult binding. Salomon bindings that can be
used with both junior and adult norm
boot soles are: TZ5, S305, C305,
Q300, S300, their mini equivalents,
earlier model indemnified equivalents, and their various counter parts.
(The added width of an adult norm
boot sole somewhat limits the shock
absorption capability of these models
and they should not be used with a
boot sole longer than 304 mm. As
a result, it is recommended that an
aggressive junior skier with an adult
norm boot sole use a model designed
exclusively for adult norm boots.)
A Salomon toe or heel may not be
mounted with another manufacturer’s
toe or heel. Indemnification and warranty are automatically voided for
such mixed systems.
For Rental specific preparation instructions, please refer to page 22.
Junior Boot To Binding Compatibility Chart
Junior
Boot Models
Falcon 100
Course 90
Course 80
Course 70
Falcon 60
Performa T3
Performa T2
15 Mini
Performa T3 Rental
Performa T2 Rental
Boot
Norms
Adult
Adult
Adult
Adult
Junior
Adult
Junior
Junior
Adult
Junior
IMPORTANT:
Junior
Bindings Only
Salomon bindings that can
be used with both junior
and adult norm boot soles
X
are: TZ5, S305, C305, Q300,
S300, their mini equivalents,
X
X
earlier model indemnified
X
counter parts.
equivalents, and their various
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Preparation > 8
Installation
Salomon bindings are installed 3 ways. “À la carte” bindings are installed by drilling holes into the surface
of the ski with the aid of a Salomon jig. Pilot Systems require no jigs and are simply secured to pre-drilled
holes on a premounted Salomon interface. Smartrak Systems can require a combination of these two techniques. Please refer to the specific instructions in this Manual.
Jig Selection & Use
A
Legend
SD
F
G
H J K
S TEP 2
A Handle with Self-Centering Clamps
S Toe Guide
D Tip-of-Boot Sole Indicator
F Locking Lever
G Mid-Sole Indicator
H Boot Size Indicator
J Drill Bit Bushing
K Self-Centering Guide for Heel of Boot
Ref. #
Jig
RETAIL JIGS
788403
Smartrak
001156
Adult Retail
001157
Wide Adult Retail
78406101 Junior Retail
RENTAL JIGS
Synchro Center & Synchro
001003
Rental/ Senior Junior
Wide Synchro Center &
001040
Synchro Rental/ Senior Junior
24729001 TZ 5 Juniortrak Rental
Jig range
Application
70mm - 116mm Smartrak binding systems only
STH 14, STH 12, STH 14 Driver, Z14, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12++, Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti, Z10 Tiw, 710, 610 CP,
56mm - 99mm STH 16,
610, 609 D+, 609 Ti, 609, 608, L 8, L 9; Drill bit length 8 mm: 607, L 7
80mm - 123mm (Same as above)
56mm - 99 mm 305 and 305 Mini, TZ 5
56mm - 99mm
All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak)
80mm - 123mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak)
56mm - 99mm
TZ 5 Juniortrak bindings only
*Contact your customer service representative for additional jigs.
Jig Use (10 Steps)
A jig ensures that all holes for binding mounting are drilled in the correct location. The bushings guide the
drill bit so that it remains perpendicular to the ski.
SCorrect
A
1.Select the proper jig for the
binding model to be mounted by referencing the Jig
Reference Guide.
2.Check the skis’ serial number
to ensure you are mounting a
matched pair. Place the skis on
the workbench with the ski tips
pointed to your left.
3.Open the jig by twisting both
handles inward. Place the jig on
the ski.
4.Open the locking lever.
5.Extend the jig to accept the
boot.
6.Place the toe of the boot sole
against the toe guide. Twist the
SPM 11 EN.indb 8
rear handle to open the rear
clamps and slide the heel guide
snugly against the boot heel.
Fig. A
7.Close the locking lever.
(Compare the mid-sole mark
on the boot with the mid-sole
indicator on the jig. If the midsole mark on the boot and the
mid-sole indicator on the jig
do not agree, use the mid-sole
mark on the boot. This requires
leaving the boot in the jig to
position it on the ski.)
8.Position the jig on the ski.
Fig. S
a. If the ski has a mid-sole mark,
align the mid-sole mark on the
boot with the mid-sole mark on
the ski.
b. If the ski has a tip-of-boot
mark, align the tip-of-boot sole
indicator on the jig with the tipof-boot mark on the ski.
c. If the ski has no visible markings for jig location, consult
the ski manu­facturer for proper
mounting position.
9.Once the jig is in position,
release the handles simultaneously and the jig will center
itself on the ski.
Incorrect
10. Re-check your work. The
ski is now ready to be drilled.
(Customers may request that
specific mounting instructions be
followed. This is particularly true
for skiers who want to initiate
turns more easily. Make a note
on the Workshop Form of any of
these special instructions.)
Reference
Page #
Section Name
10
4-Hole Toe / Spheric
Oversize
3-Hole Toe / Spheric Sport
& Quadrax
SC System Demo
SR System Rental & Demo 
10
23
23
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Installation > 9
Installation > Drilling, Tapping and Glue
Drilling, Tapping & Glue
Drilling
Incorrect
For drilling and tapping Salomon skis,
please refer to Drill Bit Selection For
Salomon Skis (page 40). For other
skis, follow the recommendations of
the ski manufacturer. In their absence,
Salomon suggests that you use the
Salomon Drill Bit Selection Guide
(below). When in doubt about the ski’s
core composition, select a 3.6 mm
diameter bit and drill one hole. If the
bit comes in contact with any metal,
re-drill with a 4.1 mm bit to ensure
proper screw retention. Exceptions:
for Equipe T, XW Fury Junior, Jade
Junior, Teneighty Fish, and Teneighty
Kitten skis, drill using either a 3,6 mm
diameter drill bit (for skis under
140 cm) or a 4,1 mm diameter drill
bit for skis greater than or equal to
140 cm. Neither tap nor glue. Use a
hand screwdriver only (3 Nm torque)
to tighten the screws on the bindings.
Drill through the jig’s proper bushings applying moderate downward
pressure on the drill. Verify that the
counter­sink bevel on the drill bit has
properly de-burred the hole. Fig. A
After drilling, turn the ski over and hit
Salomon Drill Bit Selection Guide
Skis
Diameter
4.1 mm
Junior
(ski with metal)
Ref.
8 mm
000813
1x5
000814
1x5
000893
1x5
000892
1x5
3.6 mm
8 mm
4.1 mm
9.5 mm
(ski with no metal)
Adult
Length
(ski with metal)
3.6 mm
(ski with no metal)
9.5 mm
Aspect
Length
Diameter
S
the base several times with the palm of
your hand to remove any debris from
the drilled holes.
When mounting thin skis or junior skis
with adult bindings you may need to
use shorter screws or add washers to
the existing screws between the binding and the ski to prevent damaging
the ski base. Before drilling any junior
ski, check the screw depth by positioning the binding over the mounting area
so that the binding screws on one side
of the heel track appear alongside the
ski sidewall. Fig. S
Special Cases When Drilling
Junior Skis
• Use a 9.5 mm length drill bit
when mounting Z10 Ti, Z10 Ti SC,
Z10 SC, Z10, Z10 Fis 20, 710,
710 SC, 610, 609, 609 SR, 609 SC,
608, 608 SC, L 7 SC, L 8, L 8 SC
bindings. These models use the
same screws as the Salomon adult
models and should be drilled and
tapped accordingly.
• As a general rule, the S910 Team is
mounted on skis 170 cm or longer and the S608 or C608 on skis
140–170 cm. The S608 or C608 can
also be used with skis 120–140 cm.
The S305 Grom and C305 Grom
are generally used with skis 80-140
cm*. The shorter the ski, the more
likely washers will be necessary to
avoid dimpling the ski base.
• The new Salomon C607 junior accommodates adult norm boot soles
and offers a 2 to 7 DIN scale. This
new intermediate binding for 5 to
10-year-olds features shorter 6 mm
screws for use on junior skis as
short as 120 cm.
• Whenever junior bindings are
mounted on adult skis, an increased
possibility exists of binding pull-out
due to poor screw reten­tion. The
penetration depth of junior screws
into the ski core is only 7 mm. If
neces­sary, use adult drill bits and
screws to penetrate any mounting
platform.
• The hole must be deep enough to
accommodate the screw length you
are using or ski damage may result.
*EXCEPTION: S305’s and C305’s cannot be mounted on the Crossmax 10
Team or XScream 10 Team models
manufactured from 2001 to 2003
inclusively. Both bindings may be
mounted on the 2004-2005 models
of the Crossmax 10T and Crossmax
T, 2006/2007 models of the X Wing T,
and 2007/2008 X Wing Fury Junior
and Jade Junior.
S TEP 2
Correct
A
Tapping
A
Tap all binding mounting holes
unless otherwise recommended
by the ski manufacturer. Failing
to tap when necessary can result
in topskin delamination, sidewall
delamination, broken screws or
damage to the ski core.
The tap should be mounted into
a brace. Position the brace so the
Glue
Glue must be used when inserting binding screws to:
• Lubricate the screw during insertion. Place a drop of glue on the surface
of each hole. As the screw passes
• Create a watertight seal.
through the glue it coats itself.
• Ensure that the screws will hold
while the ski is in use by acting as a Caution: Salomon strongly recomdampener.
mends its own glue for Salomon skis.
Mounting
A Posidrive No. 3 screwdriver, not a Phillips, is used to mount Salomon
bindings. Consult the Salomon Spare Parts Catalog (page 70) for reference on the Salomon screws. They are available through your customer
service representative.
SPM 11 EN.indb 9
tap goes straight into the drilled
hole. Fig. A Apply only enough
pressure to the brace to start the
tap, as the tap is a self-cutting
tool.
A ski mounting plate is usually
no more than 8 mm below the
topskin. Tapping any deeper than
8 mm can strip the hole or break
the tap. Each full turn of the brace
cuts the tap approximately 2 mm
into the ski. After tapping, turn the
ski over and hit the base several
times with the palm of your hand
to remove shavings from the hole.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
8
10
23
Jig Selection & Use
Retail Mounting
Rental & Demo Mounting
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
000821 Blue Plastic Plugs
000818 Black Plastic Plugs
000819 White Plastic Plugs
000822 Grey Plastic Plugs
000820 Red Plastic Plugs
000823 Orange Plastic Plugs
000870 Green Plastic Plugs
000816Taps
000817 Tap Brace
000811Glue
000862 Posidrive Screwdriver
B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Installation > 10
Installation > General Retail Installation
General Retail Mounting
All Salomon bindings feature
the E-Z Mount System with the
screws already in place. Position
the component over the prepared holes to begin installation
(Fig. A). If a power screwdriver
is used, adjust the clutch for the
appropriate ski core construc-
S TEP 2
A
tion. Hand check each screw after
mounting.
Toe Piece
Toe Installation differs for 4-hole toe and 3-hole toe bindings. The former requires a criss-cross screwing pattern while the latter starts with a center
mounting hole sliding track beneath the front of the toe.
S
D
F
4-hole toe Installation
Performance/Spheric Oversize
A long bit is needed (Posidrive
Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for
power drills and Salomon Manual
Screwdriver Ref. #000862) to
mount the 4-hole pattern toes as
the front two screws must be inserted through the binding housing. Fig. S
Use a crisscross screwing pattern
and insert each screw until nearly seated. Fig. D Do not tighten
until all the screws are in place.
The baseplate of the AFD should
be flush with the topskin of the ski
and each screw should be flush
with the baseplate of the toe piece.
This procedure applies for all toe
pieces with a four-hole pattern.
3-hole toe Installation
Z-concept bindings, Spheric
Sport and Quadrax
For models with a 3-hole pattern,
first pull the center mounting hole
sliding track out from the binding far
enough to insert the screw into the
ski. A long bit is needed (Posidrive
Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for
power drills and Salomon Manual
Screwdriver Ref. #000862) Fig. F
Heel Piece
Tighten the screw until it is firmly
seated. Next, slide the toe piece towards the seated center screw until
the two rear screws align with their
respective holes.
Tighten the rear screws until they
are firmly seated. The base plate
should be flush with the topskin of
the ski and the head of each screw
should be flush with the baseplate.
Ski Brake
Heel Piece Installation
Place the heel over the prepared
holes and insert the screws using
a crisscross screwing pattern. (Do
not compress the ski brake before
it is mounted on the ski.) Fig. G
Do not over tighten.
G
Ski Brake Installation
Do not compress the ski brake
before installing it. Place the two
metal tabs on the front of the
brake into the slots in the heel
base plate Fig. H. Rotate the rear
of the brake downwards to start
the screw in the track. Tighten
screws with a hand screwdriver
(4 Nm maximum).
Note: The brake can be removed to
facilitate ski maintenance.
To remove it: turn the center screw
counterclockwise and remove
the brake.
H
Legend
Z12 Ti
Reference
Page #
Heel Track
Heel Housing
Heel Lever
Heel Cup
Treadle
Brake Pedal
Pressure
Distributors
Spheric Pedal/
AFD
Toe Cup
Toe Height
Adjustment  Screw
Visual Indicator
Housing
Section Name
9
Drilling, Tapping & Glue
14Binding-to-Boot
Adjustments
23
SC System Demo
23
SR System Rental & Demo
32
Maintenance and Repairs
S912 Ti
Adjustment
Screw
Baseplate
Brake Arm
Sliding Center
Mounting Hole
Lubrication
Point*
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
000905 Salomon Grease
000862 Posidrive Screwdriver
B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit
*Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.
SPM 11 EN.indb 10
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Installation > 11
Installation > Model-specific Installation
Smartrak System
A
S
D
F
Smartrack Grip & Grip Plus (fixed
toe systems):
Insert metal band into the recessed
slots in the plate. Fig. A
Install the heel unit by lifting the
tab located just in front of the heel
piece and sliding the heel assembly
onto the Smartrak plate. Fig. F
Determine sole length in mm of
boot.
Attach the brake in the usual
manner.
Identify the letter on the metal
band that corresponds to the boot
sole length. If the boot sole length
is between two numbers, choose
the higher number.e.g.: For a boot
sole of 320mm, choose setting
“334mm D”.
Position the boot against the toe
piece and slide the heel forward until it contacts the boot. Make sure
the heel piece “clicks” and locks
into position on the track.
Screw the center mounting sliding track into the correspondingly
lettered hole at the front of the
Smartrak plate. Fig. S
Finish mounting the three hole toe
as usual.
Push the boot into the system and
verify the forward pressure.Once
the forward pressure is correct, the
number on the metal band directly
in front of the heel provides a
guide to the quick positioning of
the second heel.
Smartrak Control, Response, and
Prolink (adjustable toe systems):
Insert the metal band into the
recessed slots in center of plate.
Fig. A
Determine the sole length of boot
to being used.
Lift the tab behind the AFD on the
toe piece and slide the toe piece
from the rear of track to the front
until the boot sole length number
on the metal band corresponds
to, or is slightly greater than, the
sole length of the boot being used.
For example: a boot sole length
of 306mm would require that you
chose a setting on the band of
308mm. Make sure the toe piece
“clicks” and locks into position on
the track. Fig. D
Install the heel piece by lifting the
tab located just in front of the heel
piece and sliding the heel assembly onto the Smartrak plate until
the boot sole length number on the
metal band corresponds to, or is
slightly greater than, the sole length
of the boot being used. For example: a boot sole length of 306mm
would require that you chose a setting on band of 308mm. Make sure
the heel piece “clicks” and locks
into position on the track. Fig. F
S TEP 2
Smartrak System Installation
There are two different mounting procedures for the Smartrack interface, based on the system type.
Install the break in the normal
manner and proceed with binding
to boot adjustments as described
on page 14 or page 24.
Smartrak Interface Mounting
The Smartrak interface is available
for use with flat skis.
Position the Smartrak metal jig
(ref# 788403) so center mark on
jig aligns with center mark of ski.
When installing a Smartrak plate
make sure the recessed slots at the
front of the interface are positioned
towards the tip of ski
Proceed with drilling, taping, and
gluing as described on page 9.
Assemble Smartrak binding following instruction as explained above
in Smartrak System Installation.
Wide Ski Installation
A
S
Wide Ski Brakes
a
b
Wide Ski Jigs are available from
Salomon to mount bindings on
wide skis. Select the proper jig for
the binding to be mounted by referencing the Jig Selection Chart.
Reversible pads adapt fat ski jigs to
different widths of skis. The pads
are changed by pulling them off
SPM 11 EN.indb 11
the jig and repositioning them to
achieve the desired width. Fig. A
The pads are properly positioned
when they touch the jig shoulder.
• 98-124 mm skis: Thin sides of
the reversible pads are positioned
to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sa
• 8 0-106 mm skis: Wide sides of
the reversible pads are positioned
to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sb
Refer to the Wide Ski Brakes chart
(right). The proper width fat ski
brake must be installed for each
specific system or indemnification
for that system will not apply.
Ski
Width
(mm)
80
85
90
100
115
130
1999 to
Current Bindings
(except LAB &
STH)*
Leasure
Performance
(Quadrax)
Ref. #
Ref. #
78574801 78574801
78145901
78574901
78575001
78575101
78575201
78830601
2007 to
Current
(LAB &
STH)*
Freeskiing
Ref. #
78575501
78575701
78575801
78575901
78855701
*See Spare Parts (page 70) for full details.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Installation > 12
Installation > Model-specific Installation (continued)
S TEP 2
Lightrak Plate
A
S
D
F
Mounting and Adjusting
Open and set the blade in straight
position and place it on the plate
with a rotational motion. Fig. A.
Identify the length of the boot sole.
Mount the toe piece:
Identify the letter that corresponds
the sole length and screw the toe
piece (if you are between two letters, choose the higher one).
Mount the heel piece:
Slide the heel piece on the interface
from the rear using the manual lock
to authorize the gliding. Fig. S.
Step in the boot and check forward
pressure, the arrow on the lock
must be within the scribed area.
Fig. F.
Mount the brake following the
usual procedure. Fig. D.
Note: the rear number on the blade
is an indication for a quick adjustment of the second ski.
Position the boot in the toe and
slide the heel until it touches the
boot.
Steeringplate Interface
Compatible with quadrax and Z binding.
Mounting: according to the boot sole
length selected, tighten the screws
on the toe and heel pieces (4Nm
torque) in the corresponding position
on interface:
253-281mm273-301mm
293-321mm 313-341mm
333-361mm353-381mm
6.Move the jig forward of the
mid-sole the same distance as
measurement A and drill the toe
holes.
7.Re-align the jig’s mid-sole mark
to the ski’s mid-sole mark.
Move the jig backwards from
the mid-sole mark the same
distance as measurement A and
drill the heel holes.
8. Install the bindings. (Verify that
screw penetration will not exceed hole depth.)
Mount the brake following the usual
procedure.
Jig Use With Extra Large Boot Soles
Occasionally a boot sole is too
large to fit a jig. In this instance,
the following procedure should
be used to allow correct mounting of the binding:
1. Open the jig to its fully extended position.
2.Place the boot heel into the jig
against the heel guide.
3.Measure the length of the sole
that extends over the toe arrow
(viewed from the underside) of
the jig.
4.Divide this length in half (measurement A).
5. Place the fully extended jig onto
the ski with the boot mid-sole
mark aligned with the mid-sole
mark on the ski.
Competition Bindings > Intended Use
Salomon distributes competition
bindings to racers and coaches.
These bindings are intended to be
used by skiers with special reten-
SPM 11 EN.indb 12
tion needs. If these bindings are
used by recreational skiers, there
is a far greater risk of injury due to
the use of more powerful springs.
Refer to Requested Settings for
instructions for skiers requesting settings not recommended by
Salomon.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Installation > 13
Installation > Model-specific Installation (continued)
LAB Binding installation
Installation of the Z14 LAB, 914 LAB, 916 LAB, 920 LAB bindings
WARNING: The 914 LAB, 916 LAB, and 920 LAB are the only bindings that should be installed on the ZZ interface
S
G
H
D
F
S TEP 2
A
Assembly
Measure boot sole length in mm and
then break the yellow plastic blade
spacer (Fig. A) at the appropriate
length (the resulting spacer should
include the last tab which matches
the boot length).
Slide the yellow blade spacer onto the
metal blade until it rests against the
black base plate. Make sure the metal
blade is properly seated in spacer.
Insert the post of the metal blade
lock plate between the rear two
screws of the toe piece. Press
firmly into place. Fig. D
Insert the end of the blade spacer
into the recessed area on the bottom
of the toe piece base plate. Fig. S
Lifter shims are an option on all
LAB models except the Z14 LAB.
If required, attach the appropri-
ZZ interface using the screw position number code (1 or 2) found in
the ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart.
Fig. F
ward of the end of the stainless
steel heel track. Fig. G
Tighten the heel screws in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten the toe screws in a crisscross pattern.
Verify that the height suits FIS
norm limits (50-55 mm).
Verify that the heel track is positioned correctly. The end of the
metal blade should be 3 mm for-
Install the brake.
ate lifter shim, (yellow = 2 mm,
black = 1 mm). Do not add more
than 5 mm of lifters.
Mounting
To begin mounting any LAB binding
model onto any interface except the
ZZ Speed 2 see the note below then
procede to next step. To mount
onto the ZZ Speed 2 interface,
select a ski with the correct size
ZZ interface plate (S, M, or L) for
the boot sole length by referring to
the ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart.
Align the binding assembly on the
ZZ Speed 2 Installation
Boot sole Size
Screw Position
length Letter
1
2
(mm)
Code
265-297
S
265-282 283-297
298-327
M
298-311 312-327
328-343
L
(N/A) 328-343
Adjustment
Place boot into binding system
and adjust the toe as usual.
Check the forward pressure: With
the boot in the binding (closed posi-
tion), adjust the forward pressure to
align the top of the head screw with
the back of the heel track. Fig. H
Reference
Page #
Section Name
8
9
15
Jig Selection & Use
Drilling, Tapping & Glue
Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
Requested Settings
15
Note
Installing any LAB binding model onto any interface except the ZZ Speed 2 requires a slightly different approach to assembly
and mounting. Assembly: the yellow plastic blade spacer has letter codes corresponding to the boot sole length and must be
broken at the appropriate tab. Make a note of this letter. The rest of the assembly is the same. Mounting begins by aligning the
binding assembly’s center mark (arrow on the yellow blade spacer) to the corresponding letter code on the interface before
tightening the toe screws and continuing with the rest of the mounting and adjustment as with current models.
SPM 11 EN.indb 13
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
000902
001023
001056
887528
Salomon Adjustment Tool
Adult Binding Paper Jig
Salomon Powder Option
Poweraxe Paper Jig
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Adjustment > 14
Binding-to-Boot Adjustments
Adjusting
Heel Position / Forward Pressure
S TEP 3
All forward pressure adjustments should be verified with the boot in the binding.
A
S
D
Adjustment Tab Models.
(All current retail models) Check
that the tip of the boot sole is
flush against the butt plate of
the toe piece (or central roller of
applicable models). The forward
pressure is correct when the arrow on the adjustment tab lines
up within the scribed area at the
end of the heel housing Fig. A or
when the arrow of the rear of the
heel housing lines up within the
scribed area on the adjustment
tab. Fig. S 2009/2010 models
no longer have embossed arrows
on the adjustment tab. The back
edge of the tab should be used
instead. Fig. D If this adjustment
is incorrect, remove the boot from
the binding, lift the adjustment tab
using a Salomon Adjustment Tool
and slide the heel to the desired
position. Fig. F Re-insert the
boot and check the adjustment.
Micro Metric Heel Adjustment
for the STH 16 and 12.
With the boot in the binding (closed
position), adjust the forward pressure to align the top of the screw
head with the back of the heel track.
Fig. G
H
J
F
G
Toe Cup Width
G
Correct
Independent Wing
Adjustment Models.
The adjustment screws for models with independent wing adjustments are located on each side of
the toe piece. Adjust each wing
snugly against the boot sole so
that the boot is centered over the
ski. Fig. G Do not over tighten
Fig. H as it forces the boot backward, increasing the forward pressure. When properly adjusted, the
Incorrect
toe contacts the boot sole at three
points: the butt plate and the low
friction inserts in each wing arm.
Simultaneous Wing
Adjustment Models.
(916, S914, S912, S810, S850
Models and their predecessors). The
adjustment screw for models with
simultaneous wing adjustments is
located on the left of the toe piece.
Fig. J By turning this screw, both
toe wings adjust ­
simultaneously. Adjust the wings
snugly against the boot sole. Do not
over tighten. The toe cup adjustment is correct when there are three
points of contact: the butt plate
and the low friction inserts on each
wing arm.
Automatic Wing
Adjustment Models.
Spheric Sport and Quadrax model
toe wings adjust automatically. The
C305 adjusts automatically to ac-
cept either children’s or adult norm
boots. (The added width of an adult
norm boot sole somewhat limits the
shock absorption capability of the
C305. It is suggested that aggressive junior skiers with an adult norm
boot sole use a model designed exclusively for adult norm boots.)
Toe Height
K
All Salomon retail binding models
must have a clearance of 0-0.5
mm between the AFD and boot
toe. Fig. K
Automatic Wing
Adjustment Models.
Toe height adjusts automatically
on all current automatic wing
adjustment binding models (Z14
to TZ 5).
SPM 11 EN.indb 14
Manual Models.
Currently only the 914 binding model features manual toe
height adjustment. Raise the toe
by turning the adjustment screw,
located on top of the toe piece,
counterclockwise. Pull the boot
back to create a gap between the
boot sole and the binding AFD.
Adjust the toe height to create a
gap of not more than 0.5 mm or
until the boot sole just touches the
AFD. You can use a Salomon 0.5
mm toe height adjust­ment card to
gauge this clearance. Do not over
tighten. (Always re-check the
forward pressure adjustment after
making any toe cup adjustments.)
Reference
Page #
Section Name
15
Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
AFD Replacement
33
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Release value > 15
Release Value Selection & Adjustment
Determining Skier Type
It is the skier’s responsibility to determine Skier
Type. Skier Type is not the same as skier ability
and the two should not be confused. Skier Type
must be indicated on the workshop form or rental
form by the skier. The Skier Classification Chart
is available in small and large poster size versions
from Salomon and should be displayed to assist
customers in classifying themselves.
What type of skier are you?
Determining your SKIER TYPE is
your responsibility! Your skier
type, height, weight, age and ski
boot sole length are used by the
shop to determine the visual indicator settings of your ski bindings.
Be sure to provide accurate information, as any error may increase
your risk of injury. Consult these
descriptions to select your classification:
TYPE 1 “Cautious skiing at
LOWER visual indicator settings”
• Prefer slow to moderate speeds.
• Prefer gentle to moderate terrain.
• Receive lower than average visual indicator settings. This may
increase the risk of inadvertent
binding release in order to increase the likelihood of release
in a fall.
• Type 1 settings apply to “entrylevel skiers uncertain of their
classification”.
TYPE 2 “Moderate skiing at
AVERAGE visual indicator settings”
• Prefer a variety of speeds.
• Prefer varied terrain.
• Type 2 skiers are skiers who do
not meet all the descriptions of
Type 1 or Type 3 skier types.
If from experience, you have been
dissatisfied with visual indicator
settings resulting from your selected skier type classification, you
may wish to consider: (a) changing your skier type classification;
(b) selecting different skier type
classifications for toe and heel
components; (c) selecting skier
Types -1 ("for skiers who desire
visual indicator settings lower than
settings for a Type 1 skier") or 3+
("for skiers who desire visual indicator settings higher than settings
for a Type 3 skier").
Requested Settings
Skiers Requesting Settings Not Recommended by Salomon
The 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart is the only release adjustment
chart authorized for use by Salomon dealers during the 2010/2011 season. Salomon recognizes a skier’s right to choose settings outside those
recommended as per the current Salomon Adjustment Chart (particularly
when the skier’s preferred setting is also within the range of acceptable
settings).
If the skier requests a setting other than the one derived from the current
Salomon Adjustment Chart, the shop may:
• Adjust the system to individual requests IF the technician notes on
the workshop or rental form the reason the higher or lower setting
was requested. The customer must verify the request for the higher or
lower settings by signing and dating the form by the noted reason of
the setting request. (It is suggested that the shop have the skier sign a
release identical to the Release Agreement printed on this page. The
release must then be attached to the completed workshop or rental
form.) NOTE: Current Salomon workshop and rental forms include a
"Requested Settings" option for customer requested settings, which
eliminates the need for a separate release in such instances.
• Adjust the system to the setting derived from the Salomon Adjustment
Chart and instruct the skier on how to change the setting.
Release Agreement
I,
hereby acknowledge that I have been advised by the
S TEP 4
These descriptions are compatible with ASTM and ISO documents.
TYPE 3 “Aggressive skiing at
HIGHER visual indicator settings”
• Prefer fast speeds.
• Prefer steep terrain.
• Receive higher than average visual indicator settings. This may
reduce the likelihood of release
in a fall in order to decrease the
risk of inadvertent binding release.
(rental shop, sales department, etc.) that the setting which I have
 )
requested for my bindings (Model 
is not the setting recommended by the manufacturer of the bindings for
a skier of my height, weight, age and skier type. I understand that as a
condition of obtaining this setting on the bindings at the time of their delivery, I must agree to forever release the shop, its employees and agents,
the manufacturer, and the distributor from any and all liability for injury
or death which results to me or others from the use of these bindings. I
acknowledge that there may be increased risk of injury or death to me as
a result of my own personal preference for binding setting, particularly in
view of the inherent and other risks of the sport of skiing. I hereby waive
all claims arising from the use of the bindings and release from all liability the shop, the distributor and the manufacturer, their agents and employees and I further agree to indemnify them from any and all liability or
harm or damage of any kind whatsoever which may result from the use of
these bindings by myself or anyone I allow to use the bindings.
I, the undersigned, have read and understand this liability release agreement, and agree that it is binding upon me, my heirs, guardians, administrators, assigns, and legal representatives.
Skier Signature
(or, in the case of a minor, that of the skier’s parent or guardian)
Shop Manager’s Signature
SPM 11 EN.indb 15
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Release value > 16
Release Value Selection & Adjustment > (continued)
S TEP 4
2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart
Torque Range
2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART
Initial Toe/Heel Indicator
Skier
Weight
lb
kg
Height
ft-in/cm
Skier
Code*
<>231251271291311331230 mm 250 mm 270 mm 290 mm 310 mm 330 mm 350 mm 351 mm
5
18
8
29
11
40
14
52
17
64
20
75
23
87
27
102
31
120
41/2 4 31/2 31/2 3
37
141
J
51/2 5 41/2 4 31/2 3
43
165
K
61/2
L
71/2
3/
4
3/
4
3/
4
B
1
3/
4
3/
4
C
11/2
11/4
11/4
1
2
13/4
11/2
11/2
1013
3038
1417
3947
1821
4856
2225
D
5766
2630
E
6778
3135
F
7991
3641
G
92107
42- <- 4'10"
48 <- 148 cm
H
31/2 3
108125
49- 4'11"-5'1"
57 149-157 cm
I
126147
58- 5'2"-5'5"
66 158-166 cm
148174
6778
175209
79- 5'11"-6'4"
94 179-194 cm
>210
>95
A
>- 6'5"
>- 195 cm
Twist Forward
Lean
by Boot Sole Length (mm)
2229
5'6"-5'10"
167-178 cm
REF.
In-use Range
(Newton Meters)
Inspection Range
All current model Salomon
bindings use the DIN
adjustment scale. Release
setting numbers on this
scale are referred to as
“visual indicator settings.” Some older model
Salomon bindings were
manufactured prior to the
establishment of the DIN
standard scale and use
a different adjustment
scale. Refer to previous
Shop Practices Manuals to
adjust these models.
The 2010/2011
Adjustment Chart is the
only release adjustment
chart authorized for
Salomon dealers during
the 2010/2011 season.
Only those settings
recommended by Salomon
should be used when determining the appropriate
adjustment for each skier’s
system. Refer to Skier’s
Requesting Settings
Not Recommended by
Salomon (page 15) for
skiers requesting other
settings.
3/
4
11/4
21/2 21/4 2 13/4 11/2 11/2
3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 13/4
31/2 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2
3 23/4 21/2
6
51/2
7
61/2
5
41/2
4
50
194
6
51/2
5
58
229
61/2
6
67
271
78
320
81/2
8
7
N
10
91/2
81/2
8
71/2
O
111/2
10
91/2
9
91
380
11
101/2
105
452
121
520
137
588
M
P
11
12
* Based on "Type 1" Skier
Determining & Adjusting Visual Indicator Settings
The following procedure is used for
determining visual indicator settings using the 2010/2011 Salomon
Adjustment Chart.
1.Find the Skier’s Code. Locate the
skier’s weight and height in the
first two columns. If the skier’s
weight and height are not in the
same row, select the Skier’s code
that is closest to the top of the
chart.
2.The skier’s code is appropriate for
Type 1 skiers:
• For Type 2 skiers, move down
on the chart one row.
• For Type 3 skiers, move down
on the chart two rows.
SPM 11 EN.indb 16
• For Type -1 skiers, move up on
the chart one row.
• For Type 3+ skiers, move down
on the chart three rows.
• A skier may select different skier
types for toe and heel piece.
3.For skiers age 9 and younger or
age 50 and older, move up the
chart one row.
• For skiers 29 lbs. and under, no
further correction is appropriate.
• For skiers 38 lbs. and under,
Skier Type -1 is inappropriate.
4.Locate the column that represents
the skier’s boot sole length (in
mm).
5.The box at the intersection of the
skier’s boot sole length column
and the Skier’s Code row shows
the initial visual indicator setting
for the skier. If the intersection
of the row and column falls in a
blank box, move left or right on
the same row to the nearest box
showing a visual indicator setting.
6.Record the visual indicator settings on the Workshop Form.
• If a skier selects different skier
types for toe and heel piece, it
must be recorded on the workshop or rental form in the order
toe/heel (T/H), using a (/) to
separate the two types.
Visual Indicator Setting Adjustment
Adjust both toes and heels of the
system to the visual indicator setting
derived from the adjustment chart.
Sometimes a technician may experience difficulty determining exactly
where the visual indicator should
appear in the binding’s visual indicator window. For example, a setting of
51/2 is not precisely marked on the
binding. The technician should use
those values that are clearly marked
on the binding as reference points
and set the release adjustment as
close as possible to the setting that
is recorded on the Workshop Form.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Final Checking > 17
Final Checking & Visual Inspection
While anyone can mount and adjust a Salomon binding, to receive ­indemnification from Salomon a Salomon
Certified Technician must sign or initial the Workshop Form attesting that all systems inspections have been
performed. A Final Check is your quality control measure to verify that all required procedures have been
properly completed.
Visual Inspection of System Components
Common Compatibility Problems
The Boot
• Inconsistencies with ISO and
applicable norms.
• Gross irregularities where the
boot contacts the binding and
the AFD.
• Unacceptable low grade
thermoplastic construction.
• Rubber and/or metal tip
protectors
• Mold flashings.
• Excessive wear.
• Stripped or jammed toe height
and cup adjustment screws.
• Jammed release adjustment
screw.
• Other visible wear.
• Improperly installed leash
or brake.
• Irregular heel track function.
• Bent or broken baseplate, track
or heel.
Test for Elastic Travel & Return
A
S
Lateral
Secure the ski. Hit the forefoot area of the boot with an object that will not
damage the boot, such as a rubber hammer. Fig. A Use sufficient force
to move the boot off-center, but not hard enough to release the system.
The boot should move off-center at least 5 mm and return to center
within 2 mm of its original position.
Vertical
Depress the heel lever while pulling forward on the upper cuff of the boot
until the boot heel lifts at least 5 mm. Fig. S Release both hands simultaneously. The boot should return to the ski quickly and smoothly. This
inspection can be performed either manually or by using a mechanical
testing device. If a testing device is used, follow the recommendations of
the test device manufacturer for proper procedure.
If the system passes these tests, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop
Form for “Test for Elastic Travel & Return”. If the system fails, see
Troubleshooting.
SPM 11 EN.indb 17
The Ski
• Mounting screws protruding
through the base.
• Delaminated sidewall. This can
be detected visually or by running your fingers along the sides
of the ski.
• Binding baseplates not flush with
ski surface.
The Ski Brake
• Improper brake arm length.
• Improper installation.
• Broken entry pedals.
• Bent or broken brake arms.
• Delaminated topskin.
• Pre-drilled holes. As a general
rule, bindings should not be
installed on skis that have previously been drilled for three or
more sets of bindings.
• Strength of ski brake. A brake
must not compress totally when
the ski is set on a flat surface.
• Other visible wear.
Visual Inspection of the Complete System
Place the boot in the binding and check the accuracy of:
• Toe height adjustment
• Forward pressure adjustment.
(if applicable).
• Visual indicator settings.
• Toe cup width adjustment
• Symmetrical mounting of bind(if applicable).
ings to ski center line (1 mm).
• Central roller adjustment
This should be in the same loca(if applicable).
tion on both skis.
Test for Boot/Binding Compatibility
Check the boot/binding combination to ensure all components are compatible. Unless a binding is specifically designed for use with both junior
and adult norm boot soles, adult and junior systems cannot be combined,
e.g., junior boots with adult bindings or vice versa. If the system passes
this test, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop Form for “Test of BootBinding Compatibility.”
S TEP 5
The Binding Components
• Stripped, loose or
missing screws.
• Condition of the AFD (ripped,
loose, imbedded dirt, boot sole
pattern, tread imprint, etc.).
• Condition of anti-friction inserts
(where applicable).
• Missing or unreadable visual
indicators and missing windows.
• Bent or broken baseplate,
principal axis or housing.
• Debris lodged in the sole.
• Warped or improperly canted
boot sole.
• Cut-outs in the sole that
impede proper brake function.
(If you are uncertain of boot
compatibility, perform the Clean
vs. Lubricated Test. Boots that
fail this test or violate any of the
above points should not be used
with any Salomon binding.)
If you are not sure that the boot complies with standards or if you are not
sure that the system components are compatible, see Troubleshooting.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
47
Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
Troubleshooting
Salomon Workshop Form
19
21
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Testing > 18
Mechanical Inspection
It is a requirement* for Salomon indemnification that all ski/binding/boot systems be verified using a force
or torque measuring device.**
A previously damaged binding component or boot may break during the added stress of mechanical testing.
Consumers should be advised of this possibility prior to any mechanical testing of their equipment.
Twist Test & Forward Lean Tests > Release Value Within Specified Range
Twist Test (Toe)
3 Maximum
Release
Values
45, 40, 50
60, 50, 50
30, 40, 45
55, 65, 60
Exercise the toe by releas­ing it once
in each direction. Measure and
record the test result for both clockwise and counterclockwise directions Fig. A with a force or torquemeasuring device. The test result is
the middle quantitative value of three
measured release values. If the first
Middle
Quantitative Value
(Test Result)
45
50
40
60
Sample Systems Inspection Ranges
Based on Skier Code "L"
x
43
50
REF
58
x
78
67
IN-USE RANGE
Examples of Middle
Quantitative Values
INSPECTION RANGE
A
two measured values are the same,
there is no need to take a third measurement. See Examples of Middle
Quantitative Values (above)
as determined from the Salomon
Adjustment Chart. See Sample
Systems Inspection Ranges
(above).
The toe passes this inspection if
the test results in both directions
fall within the “Inspection Range”
If your test results for clock­wise and
counterclockwise release appear
to be at opposite extremes of the
inspection range, you may have an
installation error or an incompatible
boot. This is known as asymmetric
release. Troubleshoot the system and
re-test after the problem has been
corrected.
Forward Lean Test (Heel)
Exercise the heel by releasing it
once. Measure and record the
test result using a force or torque
measuring device. Fig. S The
test result should be within the
“Inspection Range.” If both twist
and forward lean results fall
within the appropriate inspection range, mark “Pass” ( ) on
the Workshop Form for “Release
Value Within Specified Range.”
S TEP 6
S
Reference
SPM 11 EN.indb 18
sary to record any of the test results on the Workshop Form. It is
only necessary to record whether
the system passed or failed each
inspection and the final visual
indicator settings. Any system
component that repeatedly fails
any inspection should not remain
in use. When the technician is satisfied that all required procedures
have been completed according
Section Name
16
2010/2011 Salomon
Adjustment Chart
Troubleshooting
Salomon Workshop Form
19
21
Results Not Within the Specified Range
If the Twist Test or Forward
Lean Test results are not within
the “Inspection Range” but are
within the greater “In-Use Range,”
the visual indicator of the component affecting the test result
should be readjusted to bring the
test result within the “Inspection
Range.” If the test result is outside the “In-Use Range,” refer to
Troubleshooting. It is not neces-
Page #
NOTE
to Salomon’s recommendations in
this manual, he or she must sign
the Workshop Form. (The signing
technician must be currently certified by Salomon.)
*U.S. Dealers only; recommended
for Canadian Dealers.
**For Salomon indemnification to
apply, the shop must follow the
test device
manufacturer’s requirements for:
• Proper use.
• Valid calibration.
• Calibration check at recommended intervals.
• Consistent results between technicians operating this device.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Testing > 19
Mechanical Inspection > Troubleshooting
Boot/Binding systems wear with time. This is expected. Normal wear and/or fatigue of a system can be
expected. If a system inspection indicates a system is not functioning as intended, the cause of the problem
must be identified and corrective action should be taken.
Troubleshooting
The first step is to re-examine each
component of the ski/binding/boot
system individually. If a problem
is found, e.g., stripped toe height
screw, out-of-standard boot sole,
improperly mounted binding, missing AFD, etc., proper Binding-toBoot Adjustments cannot be made.
No further work can be performed
on the system. Mark “Fail” ( )
on this section of the Workshop
Form.*
On used bindings, inspect all boot
to binding points of contact for excessive wear.
If the system failed the Test for
Elastic Travel & Return, check
that all boot/binding interfaces are
clean, smooth and clear of debris.
If the boot is dirty, clean it with a
solution of mild dish washing soap
and water. If the binding is dirty,
clean it according to the procedures described in Maintenance
and Repair. Check that the boot
enters the binding correctly. Make
sure the boot is properly positioned
in the toe and heel cups. Check
the visual indicator settings. They
should not exceed the minimum or
maximum setting and should be set
appropriately for the skier. Re-test
the system for Elastic Travel &
Return. If the system fails this test,
mark "Fail" ( ) on this section of
the Workshop Form.*
If the system failed the Test For
Boot/Binding Compatibility, mark
"Fail" ( ) on this section of the
Workshop Form.* If you are not
sure that the boot complies with
the mandatory standards, or if you
are not sure that the boot/binding
system components are compatible, do a Clean vs. Lubricated
Test. To perform a Clean vs.
Lubricated Test, all adjustments
to the system, e.g., visual indicator
settings, forward pressure adjustments, etc., must be the same as
when the system was previously
tested. Lubricate the boot with a
mild dish washing soap wherever
it contacts the binding and wipe off
any excess lubricant. Perform the
Twist Test and Forward Lean Test
as done previously and record your
results. Next, compare the results
of the lubricated test with those of
the previously performed non-lubricated clean test. Plot the results
on the Compatibility Tables. If the
results don’t fall within the shaded
“Pass” window on the table, the
BOOT is incompatible with the
binding and should not be used.
Mark “Fail” ( ) on the Workshop
Form.*
If no problems have been found
with the system and the Release
Value Within Specified Range cannot be obtained, further tests must
be undertaken. First, switch testers
to check operator accuracy. Next,
check the accuracy of the testing
device per the device manufacturer’s recommendations. Re-test
the system. If the system releases
*The customer should be informed of, and authorize, action needed to correct the problem. Please refer to
the Technical Reference section for warranty information on binding components covered under warranty.
outside the “In-Use Range,” mark
“Fail” ( ) on this section of the
Workshop Form.*
If the customer refuses to have
work done that is necessary to
bring the system within standards,
or requests work that violates the
recommendations of this manual,
the ­technician should check the box
next to the statement ­indicating
out-of-standard components on
the Workshop Form. A note should
be made in the Comment section
of the form describing the problem
and the skier should be warned
that continued use of the system
is inadvisable. The shop will not be
indemnified for work done on that
system.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
17
Test For Elastic Travel
and Return
Test For Boot/Binding
Compatibility
Salomon Workshop Form
Salomon Retail Binding
Limited Warranty
17
21
85
Compatibility Tables: Clean vs. Lubricated Tests
Twist Test
Forward Lean Test
400
90
360
80
320
Fail
70
Pass
60
240
Pass
200
Lubricated Test
40
30
Forward Lean (Nm)
Twist (Nm)
Lubricated Test
50
Fail
20
10
0
0
10
20
Twist (Nm)
30
Clean Test
SPM 11 EN.indb 19
Fail
280
S TEP 6
100
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
160
120
Fail
80
40
0
0
40
80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400
Forward Lean (Nm)
Clean Test
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Record Keeping > 20
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Skier Instruction & Warning
When the Certified Technician signs
or initials the Workshop Form, the
technician attests that all procedures have been completed. It is
not necessary for the technician to
personally provide the skier with instructions as long as the shop does.
To help reduce your shop’s liability
risk and to receive indemnification
from Salomon, take the following
steps whenever a skier picks up
their equipment. (If the individual
picking up the equipment is not the
intended user, treat that individual as
though they were the intended user.
In the case of minor skiers, follow
these steps in the presence of both
the minor skier and a parent or legal
guardian.)
recorded on the Workshop Form and
have the customer verify that the
settings recorded on the form agree
with the settings appearing in the
visual indicator window of the binding. (It is not necessary to explain
how these numbers are derived.)
Although skiers may work on their
own system, suggest that if a problem develops, the system should
be taken to a Salomon Authorized
Binding Dealer.
Explanation of Entry/Exit/Re-entry
The proper use of the system (entry,
exit and re-entry) must be explained
using the skier’s own system as an
example.
Skier Signature on the
Workshop Form
The skier must read and understand the conditions specified in the
Liability Release Agreement. Point
out that the skier is signing a release
of liability and that included in the
release is a specific warning that
the binding will not release under
all circumstances nor is it possible
to predict every situation in which it
Explanation of Parts and
Release Adjustments
Show the skier where the visual
indicator adjustment caps/screws
are located. Point out the bindingto-boot adjustments. Indicate where
the visual indicator settings are
Receipt of In-Box Instructions
When a skier purchases a new
binding, it is required that they also
receive the in-box pamphlet included
in each binding box. The pamphlet
should be reviewed with the skier so
that it is fully understood.
will release, and it is, therefore, no
guarantee of the skier’s safety.
The Skier must then sign the
Workshop Form, indicating the
skier:
• Has been instructed in the proper
use of the equipment.
• Has received the in-box pamphlet
(new bindings only).
• Has verified that the visual indicator
settings correspond to the recorded settings on the Workshop Form.
• Has read and understands the specific information on the Workshop
Form that releases the shop, manufacturer and distributor from liability.
• Understands that skiing involves
inherent risks and that injuries are
a common and ordinary occurrence
of the sport.
• Understands that included in the
Liability Release Agreement is the
specific warning that the binding
will not release at all times or under
all circumstances where release
may prevent injury or death, nor is
it possible to predict every situation in which it will release, and it
is, therefore, no guarantee of their
safety.
• Understands that the bindings
should be maintained as per
suggestions in Maintenance
Guidelines prior to the beginning
of each season and every 30 skier
days per year.
The person who signs the Workshop
Form should be the intended user of
the equipment. In the case of a minor skier, the signature on the form
must be that of the skier’s parent
or legal guardian. If someone other
than the skier or the skier’s parent
or guardian picks up the equipment,
this person should be treated as
though he or she were the skier and,
therefore, must sign the Workshop
Form. A note must be placed on the
Workshop Form that the “agent”
must transmit the information to the
intended user. If a skier refuses to
sign the Workshop Form, Salomon
will not provide indemnification and
the shop should consider refusing to
provide service to the skier.
Receipt of Workshop Form
The skier must be given a copy of
the Workshop Form that includes a
signed copy of the Liability Release
Agreement.
Retail Record Keeping
S TEP 7
A Salomon authorized shop is
required to keep accurate records
of work performed. Aside from the
legal reasons, accurate records provide a permanent history of the customers you have serviced over the
years. Workshop records must be
kept for five years or for the statute
of limitations of the state or province, whichever period is longer.
The following is a list of information* that must be recorded every
time a Salomon binding is mounted
and/or adjusted. It is not necessary
to use a Salomon Workshop Form,
but any form that the shop uses
should include all the information
listed below.*
1. *Date of transaction.
2. *Name and address of the skier.
3. *Skier’s height, weight, age and
skier type.
4. *Skis (brand, model and serial
number).
5. *Boot (brand, model and sole
length).
6. *Binding (brand and model).
SPM 11 EN.indb 20
7. *Skier’s Code.
8. *System inspection results
("Pass" or "Fail" for all functional
tests must be indicated).
9. *Visual indicator settings.
10.*Salomon Certified Technician’s
initials or signature attesting
that all functional tests and
instructional procedures have
been completed.
11.*Liability Release Agreement
which is either the same as/
or substantial equivalent of the
Salomon form.
12.*Skier signature (or that of the
skier’s agent or, in the case of a
minor, that of the skier’s parent
or guardian) attesting that the
skier:
a. Has been instructed in the
proper use of the equipment.
b.Has received the in-box pamphlet (new bindings only).
c. Has verified that the visual
indicator settings correspond
to the recorded visual indicator settings.
d.Has read and understands the
Liability Release Agreement
on the Workshop Form.
e. Understands that there are
inherent and other risks in
the sport of snow skiing and
agrees to assume those risks.
f. Understands that included
in the Liability Release
Agreement is the specific
warning that the binding will
not release under all circumstances where release may
prevent injury or death, nor
is it possible to predict every
situation in which it will release, and it is, therefore, no
guarantee of their safety.
g.Understands that bindings
should be maintained as per
suggestions in Maintenance
Guidelines.
13.Notes on the boot sole’s material, shape and/or condition
should be made when necessary.
14.If the visual indicator settings
vary from the recommended
setting, note the reason for this.
Attach a signed release to the
Workshop Form. NOTE: Current
Salomon workshop and rental
forms include a "Requested
Settings" option for customer
requested settings, which eliminates the need for a separate
release in such instances.
15.Refusal to serve statement. This
statement should be written so
as to absolve the ski shop from
any liability when the customer
refuses to have work performed
as per guidelines of Salomon
and the shop
Note
*Without this information, indemnification will not apply.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
21
21
Salomon Workshop Form
Liability Release
Agreement
Maintenance Guidelines
32
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Retail Systems > Record Keeping > 21
8410009333 ©2005, Moore Wallace All rights reserved. - 0207
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
(Shaded areas for shop use only)
Salomon Workshop Form*
Taken
By:
Date
Due:
Date:
Last
Name:
First
LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT
M.I.
I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s
safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards equipped
with release bindings, this binding system will not release at all
times or under all circumstances where release may prevent injury
or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it
will release. In snowboarding, cross-country skiing, skiboarding
with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing
and other sports utilizing equipment with non-release bindings, the
binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings
are not designed to release as a result of forces generated during
ordinary operation.
Street
City
State
Zip
Phone #
Your Weight
Your
lbs. Height
ft.
in.
Age
Downhill Skiing
Snowboard
Indicate Skier Type:
Stance:
Goofy
Regular
L
°
R
°
Acknowledgement of Personal Information,
Equipment Instructions & Liability Release
Agreement
I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is
true and correct. I will not use any of my equipment until I have
received instruction on its use and I fully understand its use and
function [including receipt of accompanying manufacturer’s
instruction pamphlet[s] for new equipment]. I agree to verify that the
visual indicator settings to be recorded on this form for downhill ski
equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with
the number appearing in the visual indicator windows of the
equipment to be listed on this form. I agree to read and execute the
LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT on the back of this form.
I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding,
snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL SNOW
SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH.
I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of injury or death
that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or
which relate in any way to the use of this equipment.
I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW
SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of injuries to
the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death
can result from both low and high energy impacts, even when a
helmet is worn.
I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the facility servicing
this equipment, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers,
directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and
their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from all
liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results
from the equipment user’s participation in the RECREATIONAL
SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is
related in any way to the use of this equipment, including all
liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or
any other person or cause.
Equipment User’s
Signature:
Parent/Guardian Signature
(if not adult user):
SKIS/SNOWBOARD/SKIBOARD
Serial No:
BOOTS
Model:
BINDINGS
Brand:
POLES
Brand:
Other:
Model
.
$
I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss
or damage, including any that results from claims or lawsuits for
personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in
any way to the use of this equipment.
Sole Length (cm):
Model:
This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or
province. If any provision of this agreement is determined to be
unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and
effect.
Length:
EQUIPMENT TOTAL
.
$
Work Requested
I, THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS
LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT.
FWD PRESSURE
DIN SETTING
TOE HEIGHT
SCREW TENSION
WAXED / EDGED
TECH INITIAL:
Equipment
Labor
Sub-Total
Tax
TOTAL
RELEASE BINDING SYSTEM INSPECTION
User’s Signature:
Date:
.
$
Parent/Guardian/Agent: I verify that I am the parent, guardian or
agent of the equipment user; I have the authority to enter into this
agreement on behalf of the equipment user; and I agree to be
bound by the terms and conditions of this agreement.
Skier’s Code
Visual Indicator Settings
R Toe L Toe
R Toe
L Heel
R Heel L Heel
R Heel
Comments:
Technician’s Signature:
Parent/Guardian/
Agent’s Signature:
Date:
Requested Settings
L Toe
Note
*U.S. form shown.
Reference
Name
S TEP 7
PASS
FAIL
N/A
Binding-to-Boot Adjustment
( )
( )
( )
Test for Elastic Travel & Return
( )
( )
( )
Test of Boot-Binding Compatibility
( )
( )
( )
Release Value Within Specified Range
( )
( )
( )
Due to system components that are out of standard or otherwise unsuitable,
the work cannot be performed. (See COMMENTS below)
Page #
Section Name
20
Skier Instruction &
Warning
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
B1WSFM (U.S. only)
Workshop Form
B10008 (Can. Bilingual)
Workshop Form
Name
Name
SPM 11 EN.indb 21
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
22
Rental &
DEMO Binding
Systems
Photo: Dan Carr. Skier: Sammy Carlson.
Proper procedures for a Salomon Certified
Technician to follow while mounting and 
adjusting Salomon Rental
and Demo bindings.
S TEP 1
Preparation
For general Preparation Instructions, please refer to page 7.
All rental skis must have an Identification Number and a method to record maintenance and testing information (e.g., Salomon sample Ski/Binding Maintenance Record and Boot Maintenance Record).
Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Bindings are designed to be used with specific norm boot soles, i.e., junior norm boot soles with junior bindings and adult norm boot soles with
adult bindings. Under no circumstances should a junior boot be used with
an adult binding. The C305 and S305 are designed for use with junior
norm boot soles and smaller adult norm boot soles.
Jig Selection
See page 24 for Synchro preset requirements. Contact your
Reference
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
001156 Adult Retail Jig
001003 Rental Jig
001040 Rental Jig Wide Skis
78313301Extralight Jig
SPM 11 EN.indb 22
Page #
Section Name
7
Boot-to-Binding
Compatibility
Jig Selection & Use
Drilling, Tapping & Glue
Rental Visual &
Mechanical Inspections
Maintenance Records
8
9
25
28
Models
Din Scale
Z12 SC
710 SC
609 SC
609 SR
608 SC
711 SC
L 8 SC
L 7 SC
607 SR
L 7 SR
305 SC
305 SR
TZ 5 SR
TZ 5 SC
TZ 5 Juniortrak
4 to 12
3 to 10
2.5 to 9
2.5 to 9
2 to 7.5
3.5 to 11
2.5 to 8
2 to 7.5
2 to 7
2 to 7.5
0.75 to 4.5
0.75 to 4.5
0.5 to 4.5
0.5 to 4.5
0.5 to 4.5 24729001
Wide skis
80 - 123 mm
Jig Ref. #
Jig Ref. # 001040
See Jig Selection & Use on
page 8 for more information.
Rental Jig Selection Chart
Ski width
56 - 99 mm
customer service representative
for additional jigs to mount older
models of Salomon rental bindings.
Jig Ref. # 001003
Two jigs are needed to mount
current model Salomon rental
bindings. The jigs can be used for
both Synchro and non Synchro
Systems. Please refer to the
Rental Jig Selection Chart (right)
for the reference numbers.
Boot Sole
Range
(mm)
260 - 382
260 - 382
260 - 382
230 - 308
260 - 382
260 - 382
260 - 382
260 - 382
230 - 308
230 - 308
216 - 304
190 - 246
190 - 246
216 - 304
200 - 308
Synchro
Pre-Sets
Required
(Toe height
& Toe wings)
•
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Preparation 23
Installation
There are two basic types of
Synchro System bindings: SC and
SR. While both have a moveable
heel piece, only the SC (Synchro
Center) models have a moveable
toe, allowing both the toe and heel
piece to be adjusted to “center”
the boot.
Legend
S912 Light
S TEP 2
To set up the Synchro Systems,
you will need: Salomon rental bindings with Synchro Heel Guides and
the parts listed below
C608 SR
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
Adult Retail Jig
Rental Jig
Wide Sizes Rental Sticker
Salomon Boot Sole
Measuring Device
000902 Rental Adjustment Tool
Heel Track
Adjustment
Loop
Adjustment
Screw
001156
001003
001191
001189
Visual Indicator
Heel Lever
Heel Cup
Brake Pedal
Adjustment
Range
Indicators
Spheric Pedal/
AFD
Toe Cup
Toe Height
Adjustment
Screw
Visual Indicator
Adjustment
Screw
Toe Length
Adjustment
Screw
Brake Arm
Heel Housing
Baseplate
Lubrication
Point*
*Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.
Salomon Synchro System
A
S
Color-coded adjustment range indicators
2004/2005 and later Synchro Center Systems use color-coded adjustment
range indicators.
Simply read the boot sole length in mm’s (stamped on the side of the boot
sole) and move the toe to the corresponding mm length range position
Fig. G. Each range is individually color coded.
D
F
Then move the heel to the correct color coded mm length mark shown on the
heel track cover Fig. H.
Color coding makes it easier to read. For example: when the toe is positioned
in the yellow (296 – 307 mm) range, look for the matching yellow rectangles
(296 mm, 304 mm, 307 mm) on the heel track cover.
SR Models (non-moveable toe) are
mounted using the Retail procedures.
Non-Synchro System Follow Synchro
System procedures, omitting measurement of boots and affixing
Synchro Stickers.
SC Models (moveable toe) are
mounted using the procedures described below.
First, set the jig to the proper position. It is imperative that the jig be
set correctly and all bindings be
mounted at the correct position. For
consistent mounting, drill the jig and
pin it in the correct position.
ext, place the jig properly on the
N
ski, drill the ski and remove any
shavings. Place a drop of glue onto
the drilled holes. On SC (move­able
toe) model bindings, mount the toe
plate securely with the four screws
provided Fig. A. Move the adjustment lever on the front of the toe to
the left and con­tinue to slide the toe
onto the plate Fig. S.
G
Lines on the
heel track
H
300 to 303 mm
Heel piece position for a boot
sole length of 302 mm
(white triangle on the heel housing)
Slide the central plate onto the toe
piece, Fig. D then position the heel
over the central plate and holes,
Fig. F and tighten using a crisscross pattern.
Toe piece position for a boot
sole length of 302 mm
SPM 11 EN.indb 23
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Installation > 24
Binding-to-Boot AdJustments
Adjusting
Toe Position
A
Synchro Center Models. Move
the button on the front of the toe
to the left, and slide the toe to the
Synchro position indicated. Ensure
Toe Height
the toe locks firmly in place. For
S850 and other non-current SC
models, push the toe back, depress the button on the left side
of the toe, and slide the toe into
position. Fig. A The toe locks into
place automatically. The adjust­
ment is correct when the mid-sole
mark on the ski is aligned with the
mid-sole mark on the boot.
S TEP 3
Heel Position / Forward Pressure
S
Finger Adjustment Models.
Lift the adjustment loop at the
back of the heel and slide the
heel forward to the Synchro position indicated or until the binding
heel cup contacts the boot heel.
Fig. S Release the loop, push the
D
boot down and check the forward
pressure indicator. The silver tab
should be visible in the housing
window. Fig. D (It is not necessary to put the boot in the binding
for Synchro applications.)
Automatic Models.
Sport/Quadrax toes have automatic
toe height ­adjustment.
Micrometric Models.
Raise the toe by turning the adjustment screw, located on top of
the toe piece counterclockwise.
Pull the boot back and continue to
turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise until you see light
between the boot sole and the
binding AFD. Turn the screw clockwise until the gap is no more than
0.5 mm or preset for Synchro systems using a preset toe height.*
Toe Cup Width
Automatic Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counterparts (see page 14).
Independent Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counterparts (see page 14) or preset for
Synchro systems using a preset
toe width.*
Reference
Page #
Section Name
15
Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
Pre-Season Inspections
25
Simultaneous Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counterparts (see page 14) or preset for
Synchro systems using a preset
toe width.*
Note
*Synchro Presets.
Micrometric toe heights, independent and simultaneous wing
adjustments can be preset using
a Standard Norm Boot Sole (page
47) for Synchro applications. A
dab of silicone caulk can then be
put into the slot of the adjustment
screws to prevent tampering.
Junior TZ 5 SC Installation
A
S
G
H
The TZ 5 SC comes with an interface
plate which must first be installed
on the ski before sliding the toe and
heel pieces onto its tracks. Mounting
the TZ 5 SC interface plate requires
a new jig (ref. #24729001) though
the procedure should otherwise be
familiar.
SPM 11 EN.indb 24
Center the jig on the ski and drill
as usual (refer to Jig Use as well as
Drilling Tapping & Glue on pages
8 and 9).
Mount the TZ 5 SC interface on the
ski using the screws provided.
Check the manual lock of the toe
piece is totally opened (Fig. A)
D
and remove the brake lock from
the brake.
Slide the toe piece onto the front
of the interface until it corresponds
with or is just above your boot sole
length (Fig. S). Make sure the toe
unit clicks into place.
Close the manual lock (Fig. D).
F
Slide the heel piece onto the back of
the heel track while holding up the
manual lock (Fig. F) until it corresponds with or is just above your
boot sole length (Fig. G). Make
sure the heel unit clicks into place.
Caution: check again that the manual lock of the toe piece is closed
(Fig. H).
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Adjustments > 25
Release Value Selection & Adjustment
2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart
All current Salomon rental bindings must be adjusted according to the 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart. This is the only
release adjustment chart authorized for Salomon bindings during the 2010/2011 season. For a detailed description of the charts
and procedures recommended by Salomon, please refer to pages 15 & 16 of this Manual.
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection
The mechanical inspections discussed in this section are required of U.S. dealers and are strongly recommended for Canadian dealers, both
in the interest of consumer protection and as a sound risk-management strategy. Maintenance records must be kept for all bindings and
boots in inventory for both pre-season and in-season inspections. Only Pass/Fail results should be recorded. If bindings are switched from
one pair of skis to another, this should be noted on the records. To receive indemnification from Salomon, maintenance records must be kept
on file for five years or the statute of limitations in your state or province, whichever is longer.
Rental Inspection Summary
Since it is impractical to perform a
full inspection each time a system
is rented, a routine of preseason
and inseason inspections has been
dure to identify and correct the deviation or malfunction. If this procedure does not correct the problem,
the binding is removed from inventory. All rental boots, new and used,
are visually inspected for damage,
wear, contamination, broken or
missing parts, or inferior materials
at contact points with the binding.
In addition, one boot per “cell” is
tested for boots that are new to the
rental inventory. A cell is all boots
of the same make, model, age, and
shell size. A random selection of
5% of all boots, previously accepted
into inventory, is also tested. Tests
are performed with a test device and
a pair of specially selected reference
bindings. If a boot fails, all boots
from that cell are then tested. Boots
that fail and cannot be repaired are
removed from inventory.
that is available for rental and equipment that has just been rented. The
equipment in the “as rented” category
is from real skiers in the condition in
which it is either dispatched or returned, while the “available for rental”
equipment may be set up for fictitious
skiers. Only single skis, not pairs, are
tested, and testing at the toe is only
required in one direction. A count is
maintained of test results that exceed
allowable limits. The magnitude and
frequency of these deviations determines the frequency of future inspections. Shops that fail an inspection
must sample daily until the source of
the problem is found and corrected.
Then, as inspection results improve,
the frequency of sampling and inspection is relaxed.
Directions of Release: Unless
otherwise specified (see Inseason
Inspection), the directions of release
to be tested are forward lean and
clockwise and counter clockwise
in twist.
Test Device: A device that meets ISO
standard 11110 [or ASTM standard
F1061] and has been checked and
maintained in the manner specified by
the device manufacturer.
Test Result or Release Torque: The
middle quantitative value of three
tests made in the same direction.
Pre-Season Inspection
Preseason inspections are performed on components of the
release system: bindings and boots.
All rental bindings, new and used,
are visually inspected, and then
tested using specially selected
Reference Boots. Bindings that fail
go through a troubleshooting proce-
Inseason Inspection
Inseason inspections are performed
on complete rental systems to ensure
that the equipment is adjusted appropriately and continues to function correctly. Typically 5% of the rental inventory is tested during each two weeks
sampling period. The random sample
is equally divided between equipment
S TEP 6
equivalent to that provided retail
shop customers under current ISO
[and ASTM] standards.
S TEP 5
procedures by the rental shop
staff. Fully implemented, the procedures that follow provide rental
shop customers a standard of care
S TEP 4
developed to verify release indicator accuracy, confirm correct
equipment function, and assure
proper assembly and adjustment
Important Terms
Correction Factor: The value that
must be added or subtracted from the
initial visual indicator setting to bring
the test result within the Inspection
Tolerance (or Inspection Range).
SPM 11 EN.indb 25
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Inspection > 26
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)
Inspection Procedures
Preseason Inspection
S TEP 6
S TEP 5
Reference Boot Selection
The Reference Boot is a boot of a
designated sole length that is otherwise typical of the boot inventory.
Use the procedure below if the boot
inventory includes several models
and a representative boot cannot be
easily identified.
1.Select five single boots with sole
lengths as specified in Table A
for the binding type to be tested:
adult, junior, or child.
2.Clean all five boots with a mild
detergent and water.
3.Adjust a rental binding to the release indicator setting specified
in Table A for the binding type.
4.Fit the binding to the boots and
determine the Release Torque
in all three directions of release
(forward lean and both directions in twist).
5.Average the Release Torque for
CW and CCW twist release.
6.Reject and replace any boot with
a CW to CCW difference of more
than 6 Nm for adult boots or
4 Nm when testing child boot
types.
7.Rank the five twist results and
select as the Reference Boot for
twist, the middle boot.
8.Rank the five forward lean results and select as the Reference
Boot for forward lean, the middle
boot.
Preseason Binding Inspection
The procedure that follows is an
integral part of preseason maintenance. It is also a good way to determine if maintenance is adequate
and which units have outlived their
usefulness and must be removed
from inventory.
1. Clean areas of the bindings that
contact the boot and perform
all preseason binding maintenance.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
17
17
Final Checking
Test for Elastic Travel &
Return
Release Value Within
Specified Range
Troubleshooting
Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
18
19
47
SPM 11 EN.indb 26
2. Visually or manually check:
•AFD condition.
•Brakes function.
•Release indicator readability
and travel.
•Screw tightness.
•[other product specific inspections if required]
3. Fit each binding to the
Reference Boot and adjust the
release indicators to the value
in Table A.
4. Check that the heel track and
toe track code (if any) agree
with the sole length code (if
any) of the Reference Boot.
5. With the Reference Boot in the
binding, verify elastic travel of
the toe piece by striking the
boot toe with a mallet or dead
hammer and checking that
the toe piece returns the boot
quickly and completely to center.
6. Verify elastic travel of the heel
piece by lifting the boot while
depressing the heel piece cocking lever and checking that
the heel piece returns the boot
quickly and completely to the
latched position. [other product
specific procedures if required]
7. Manually release the binding 3
times in each direction.
8. Lubricate all boot/binding interfaces with a mild liquid detergent and water solution.
9. With the Ski Binding Test
Device determine the Release
Torque for each direction of
release (forward lean and both
directions in twist).
10.Record “PASS” in the binding’s maintenance record if
Test Results are within the
Inspection Ranges provided in
Table A.
11.Set the ski aside if the Test
Result in any directions of release is outside the Inspection
Range in Table A.
12.Follow Troubleshooting
Procedure from the binding
manufacturer’s tech manual for
units that have been set aside
and retest if changes in the
unit’s condition or adjustment
are made.
13.Record “FAIL” in the binding’s
maintenance record if, after
troubleshooting, test results in
any direction of release are outside the In-Use Range. Replace
the “failed” unit and retest before returning the ski to service.
14.If after troubleshooting,
Test Results are outside the
Inspection Range but within
the In-Use Range, apply a
Correction Factor to the unit
and note the Correction Factor
for that unit in the binding’s
maintenance record.
15.If many bindings fail, check the
test device and re-inspect the
Reference Boot. If necessary,
select another boot and retest
the bindings.
Preseason Boot Preparation
The procedure that follows is an
integral part of preseason maintenance.
1. Clean all boots with [a mild
detergent and water], and repair
or replace damaged or missing
parts.
2. Visually check:
•Conformance with ISO and
other applicable standards. If
the boot contacts the binding,
brake, or AFD in areas other
than the designated contact
points, it may be incompatible with the binding. [product
specific figure or description]
•Boot material. If the sole
at the contact points with
the binding or AFD can be
scratched with a finger nail,
the boot may be of inferior
quality and incompatible with
the binding.
•Boot sole condition. If the
boot sole is damaged, worn,
or contaminated at contact
points with the binding or AFD
in a manner which can not be
corrected, the boot may be
incompatible with the binding.
•Brake compatibility with sole.
•Rubber and/or metal sole
protectors. If such materials
contact the binding or AFD
the boot may be incompatible
with the binding.
•Mold flashings. Flashing
which can be seen or felt at
contact points with the binding, brake, or AFD must be
carefully removed.
3. Remove from inventory all
boots that have failed the visual
check.
Preseason Boot Sampling
Although sampling eliminates the
need to test every boot before the
season starts, the sample chosen must be representative of the
inventory.
1. For boots that are new to inventory or have never been inspected, take a single boot from
each cell (a cell is all boots of
the same make, model, year,
and shell size).
2. For used boots, take a 5% (but
not less than 16 or more than
80) random sample of the entire inventory. Make sure that
there is at least one boot from
each cell in the sample.
Table A : Preseason Binding Inspection*
Sole Release
Skier Binding
Length Indicator
Code Type
(mm) Setting
Reference Torque
(Nm)
Inspection Range
(Nm)
Twist Forward Lean Twist Forward Lean
F Children 270
2.5
23
87
20-27
75-102
J
Junior 306
4.5
43
141
37-50
141-194
L
Adult
327
6.0
58
229
50-67
194-271
* This is an example only. Check the manufacturer’s tech manual before proceeding
In-Use Range
(Nm)
Twist
17-31
31-58
43-78
Forward Lean
64-120
120-229
165-320
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Inspection > 27
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)
Inspection Procedures (continued)
Preseason Boot Inspection
The procedure that follows helps to
assure both boot/binding compatibility and boot interchange ability.
Note: when using Table A, in the
Boot Inspection procedures that
follow, the Sole Length and Release
Indicator Setting columns should
be ignored.
1. Randomly select a pair of
bindings that have passed the
preseason inspection from each
binding type; adult, junior, child.
2. Lubricate all boot/binding contact points with a mild liquid
detergent.
3. Without regard to whether the
boot is new or used, sort the
sample by sole type and length
according to the 20mm Sole
Length Categories defined by
the binding manufacturer’s
Release Value Selection.
4. In each Sole Length Category
rank the boots by sole length
and select the middle boot.
5. In each Sole Length Category fit
the appropriate reference bindings to this “typical” boot and
adjust the two bindings to release as close as practical to the
Reference Torque in Table A.
Use the Reference Torque corresponding to Skier Code [L]
for the Adult binding, [J] for the
Junior binding, and [J] for the
Child binding.
6. Rinse the lubricant from one
binding and mark it “clean.”
Mark the other “lubricated.”
7. Test each boot in the Sole
Length Category with the clean
Reference Binding and then the
lubricated Reference Binding
in both twist and forward lean
(only one direction in twist is
required for the clean binding).
8. Set aside any boots for which
the lubricated Test Result is
more than 20% less than the
clean Test Result in the same
direction of release or the lubricated Test Result, in any direction of release, is outside of the
Inspection Range provided in
Table A for the Skier Code used
to set up the Reference Binding
(L, J, or F).
9. Repeat the Visual Check on all
boots that have been set aside,
correct any defects noted, and
retest. Remove from inventory
boots that fail the retest.
10.Check all other boots from the
same cell (make, model, year,
and shell size) as those that
failed.
NOTE: On completion of the preseason inspection, clean the liquid
detergent from the equipment (and
lubricate the binding before returning it to service).
Inseason Sampling And Inspection
The Inseason Inspection is a test of
complete systems and all the procedures used by the rental staff to
assemble and adjust the system.
The program uses random samples
of rental inventory taken at routine
intervals. Any sampling program
that gives every unit of inventory
the same chance as every other of
being picked is valid.
Inseason Inspection
1. Take a random sample of the
rental inventory as determined
by Table B. Take half the sample
from inventory as it is either
rented or returned and the remainder from inventory available for rental.
2. Wipe the boot clean and cycle
the boot/binding systems at
least once in each direction.
3. Test sample units in Twist (one
direction only) and Forward Lean.
4. Compare the Test Results with
the Inspection Range for the appropriate Skier Code.
5. If the results are within the
Inspection Range, the unit passes.
6. If the results are outside
Inspection Range but within the
In-Use Range, count the unit as
a Class I Deviation.
7. If the results are outside the InUse Range, count the unit as a
Class II Deviation.
8. Check elastic travel and visually
inspect the ski brake function,
interface areas between boot
and binding, including AFD, lug
height adjustment (if appropriate), and forward pressure.
Count any deficiencies as Class
I Deviations.
9. If more than the maximum
number of Class I Deviations
given in Table B are found in
the sample, or a single Class II
Deviation is detected the sample
fails and daily sampling must
be conducted until the problem
that led to the failed sample
is found and corrected. See
the “Troubleshooting” chapter
of the binding manufacturer’s
technical manual following a
failed Inseason Inspection.
10.Record the date the sample
was tested, the number of units
tested, the number of Class I
and Class II (or III) Deviations,
whether the sample passed or
failed and any actions taken.
There is no need to record the
identity of units tested or actual
Test Results.
Table B : Sample Size
Inventory
Size
(Pairs)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Sample Maximum
Size
Class I
(Units) Deviations
16
3
20
4
30
6
40
8
50
10
60
12
70
14
80
16
80
16
S TEP 6
Random sampling is conducted
throughout the entire season.
Frequency is as follows:
1.After 7 days of operation.
2.If the sample passes, the next
sampling is taken after another 7
days of operation.
3.If two consecutive samples pass,
sampling frequency is increased
to 14 days.
4.If a sample fails at any time,
daily sampling is instituted until
two consecutive samples pass,
at which point weekly sampling
resumes.
Sample size is 5% of inventory but
not less than 16 nor more than 80
units as noted in Table B. Sample
size is based on average daily output. If rental output drops below
50% of capacity over the sampling
period, the sample size can be reduced proportionately.
S TEP 5
Sample Frequency
Sample Size
Demo Inspections > Incomplete Systems
Skis
Bindings intended for demo applications, where customers supply
their own boots, must be inspected
using the procedures described
for rental equipment. Whenever a
demo or rental binding is used with
a customer’s own boot, inspect the
SPM 11 EN.indb 27
customer’s boot for Boot/Binding
Compatibility as described on
page 17. Reject any boots that fail
visual inspection. Both boots of
the pair must be inspected and the
boot sole lengths of both boots
verified.
Boots
Whenever customers rent boots
for use with their own skis, the
customer’s binding system must
be mechanically inspected (using the rental boot) according to
procedures described for retail
equipment.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
17
17
Final Checking
Test for Elastic Travel &
Return
Release Value Within
Specified Range
Troubleshooting
18
19
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Inspection > 28
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)
Maintenance Records
SKI/BINDING Maintenance Record
Toe
Left Ski
Right
Heel
Toe
Twist
Right Ski
Heel
Twist
Counter-clockwise
BOOT Maintenance Record
Clean Test
S TEP 6
Date of
Service/Inspection
Norm Compatible
Interchangeable
All Adjustments/Parts
Functionsl
Repairs/Service
Performed
Twist
Lubricated Test
Twist
Legend:Clockwise
SPM 11 EN.indb 28
Technician’s
Initials
Sole Length:
Forward
Lean
Boot Model:
Invenory #:
Forward
Lean
S TEP 5
Legend:Clockwise
Forward
Lean
Correction Factors
Left
Technician’s
Initials
Binding Model:
Forward
Lean
Date of Service/Inspection
Repairs/Service
Performed
Visual
Inspection
Ski Serial #:
Invenory #:
Counter-clockwise
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 29
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Rental Skier Instrucion & Warning
It is the Dealer’s responsibility to adequately assist each rental customer in equipment selection and to properly fit rental boots. Instructions regarding proper use of equipment must also be given at the time rental
equipment is provided.
When the Certified Technician
signs or initials the Rental Form,
the technician is attesting that all
functional and instructional procedures have been completed. To
reduce your shop’s liability risk and
to receive indemnification from
Salomon, you must take the following steps when the skier receives their equipment. (The individual picking up the equipment
must be the intended user, or in
the case of a minor, the user’s parent or guardian.)
1. Show how to step into the binding.
2. Show how to step out of the
binding.
3. Point out the visual indicator
settings on the binding’s toe
and heel pieces. The skier must
verify that these settings agree
with the settings recorded on
the Rental Form.
4. Ask the skier to read the
Liability Release Agreement.
Point out that the skier is signing a release that limits liabil-
ity. Included in this Liability
Release Agreement is the
specific warning that bindings
will not release under all circumstances where release may
prevent injury or death, nor is it
possible to predict every situation in which they will release,
and are, therefore, no guarantee
of safety.
5. The skier must understand that
there are inherent and other
risks in the sport of skiing.
6. The skier* must then sign and
date the Rental Form.
7. The skier must be given a copy
of the rental form that includes
a signed copy of the Liability
Release Agreement.
Rental Record Keeping
Proper rental record keeping is key to your shop’s risk management program. Without a properly filled out
form, including a signed Liability Release Agreement, indemnification from Salomon will not apply.
SPM 11 EN.indb 29
The following is a list of information that should be recorded for
every rental transaction. It is not
necessary to use a Salomon Rental
Form, but any form that the shop
uses must include the information* listed below. Without this
information*, indemnification will
not apply.
1. *Rental dates.
2. *Name and home address of
the skier.
3. Skier’s home phone number.
4. Skier’s identification.
5. *Skier’s height, weight, age,
and skier type.
6. *Boots' inventory number. (If
the skier is using their own
boots, the boot brand, model
and sole length must be indicated on the Rental Form
and the boot must pass visual
examination.)
7. *Skis' inventory number. (If
the skier is using their own
skis, the system would fall
under Retail guidelines and a
complete system inspection,
including a mechanical inspection, must be performed and
documented on a Workshop
Form.)
8. *Visual Indicator Settings.
9. *Salomon Certified
Technician’s signature or initials attesting that all required
procedures have been completed.
10. Rental fee.
11. *Liability Release Agreement
that is either the same as, or
the substantial equivalent of,
the Salomon release. Consult
your shop’s legal advisor to
be sure the language and type
size of this agreement conforms to state or provincial
law. If a form other than the
Salomon form is used, the
language shall accomplish
the same purpose and have
the same legal effect as the
language contained in the
Salomon agreement.
12. *Skier’s signature (in the case
of a minor skier, the signature on the form must be that
of the skier’s parent or legal
guardian) and date attesting
that the skier:
a.Has been instructed in the
proper use of the equipment.
b.Has verified that the visual
indicator settings correspond to the recorded visual
indicator settings.
c.Has read and understands
the Rental and Liability
Release Agreement on the
rental form, releasing the
shop from liability.
Reference
Page #
Section Name
17
Final Checking & System
Inspection
Salomon Rental Form
Equipment Rental
& Liability Release
Agreement
Post Accident Ski
Equipment Inspection
Report
Note
30
30
*On the 2010/2011 Salomon Rental
Form, the skier (or in the case of
a minor, the skier’s parent or legal
guardian) must sign and date the
Liability Release Agreement.
31
S TEP 7
A Rental Form must be filled out
for each rental transaction (exchange of equipment is considered
to be a transaction). A Liability
Release Agreement the same as
or the equivalent to the Salomon
Liability Release Agreement must
be included on the Rental Form.
The skier must read, under­stand,
sign and date this release. A copy
of the properly filled out Rental
Form must be kept on file for five
years or the statute of limitations
of the state or province, whichever
is longer. Multiple skier forms that
allow each skier to read and sign
the same form may be used if the
form meets the requirements outlined in this section. It is recommended that the form be reviewed
by Salomon’s Legal department
prior to use. The person who signs
the rental form must be the skier
who is going to use the rental
equipment. In the case of a minor
skier, the signature on the form
must be that of the skier’s parent
or legal guardian.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 30
Skier Instruction,
Warning & Record Keeping
PLEASE PRINT CLEARLY
(shaded areas for shop use only)
Salomon Rental Form*
Date
Out:
Date
Due:
Total Rental Days:
Last
First
M.I.
Downhill Skiing
Name:
Indicate skier type
Street
T
City
State
Zip
Phone #
Your Weight
Snowboard
Stance: (check one)
Local Accommodations
Driver’s Lic.#
Regular
State
Lbs.
H
Goofy
Your Height
ft.
in.
Age
Acknowledgement of Personal Information & Equipment Instructions
I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is true and correct. I will not use any of the equipment to be provided to
me during this transaction until I have received instruction on its use and function. I agree to verify that the visual indicator settings to be
recorded on this form for downhill ski equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with the number appearing in the
visual indicator windows of the equipment to be listed on this form.
Equipment User’s Signature:
Parent/Guardian Signature (if required):
Boot I.D.#
Sole Length & Synchro # (Downhill Skiing):
Pole Code:
Ski/Board I.D.#
Visual Indicator Settings
Requested Settings
L Toe
R Toe L Toe
R Toe
L Heel
R Heel L Heel
R Heel
Equipment Subtotal:
$
Equipment Damage Protection:
$
Total:
$
Technician’s Signature:
EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT
I accept for use AS IS the equipment listed on this form, and accept full financial responsibility for the care of the equipment
while it is in my possession. I will be responsible for the replacement at full value of any equipment rented under this form,
but not returned to the rental facility. I agree to return all rental equipment by the agreed date.
I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards
equipped with release bindings, the binding system will not release at all times or under all circumstances where release
may prevent injury or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it will release. In snowboarding,
cross-country skiing, skiboarding with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing and other sports utilizing
equipment with non-release bindings, the binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings are not
designed to release as a result of forces generated during ordinary operation.
I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding, snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL
SNOW SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH. I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of
injury or death that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or which relate in any way to the use of this
equipment.
I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of
injuries to the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death can result from both low and high energy
impacts, even when a helmet is worn.
I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the equipment rental facility, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers,
directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from
all liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results from the equipment user’s participation in the
RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is related in any way to the use of this
equipment, including all liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or any other person or cause.
S TEP 7
I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss or damage, including any that results from claims or
lawsuits for personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in any way to the use of this equipment.
This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or province. If any provision of this agreement is determined
to be unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and effect.
I THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT.
User’s Signature:
Date:
Parent/Guardian: If equipment user is a minor, I verify that I have the authority to enter into this agreement on behalf of the
equipment user and I agree to be bound by all terms and conditions of this agreement.
Date:
Parent/Guardian’s Signature:
PARTS
Note
Reference
* U.S. form shown. The Canadian
equivalent to this form has bilingual content.
Page #
Section Name
Reference # Item Name
29
Rental Skier Instruction &
Warning
B1RSFM (U.S.) Salomon Rental Form
B10019 (CAN) Salomon Rental Form
SPM 11 EN.indb 30
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 31
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form
A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form the same as or equivalent to the form provided must be
filled out if a person returns the equipment, whether the equipment is theirs or belongs to someone else, and
claims that they or someone else were injured. The report must be completed with “as is” mechanical inspection
measured release values. An insufficient or improperly completed form may cause denial of indemnification.
Inspection Report Instructions
General Information
• All information should be printed
clearly.
• Any mistakes should be corrected
and initialed.
• If information is unknown, mark
UNK in the appropriate area.
• If information does not apply, mark
N/A in the appropriate area.
Skier Information Section
• Skier information should be taken
from the rental or workshop form.
• Accident/injury information should
be taken from the ski patrol accident report (if available).
Equipment Information Section
• Information should be taken from
the visual inspection of equipment.
Facility/Personnel/Testing Device
Section
• The “Inspection Technician” should
be a current Salomon
Certified Technician.
• The report should be reviewed by
the shop manager.
SPM 11 EN.indb 31
Workshop/Rental Form No.
Skier Information
vACCIDENT DATE
NAME
vWEIGHT
HEIGHT
vAGE
vSEX (circle one)
M
vSKIER TYPE (circle one)
1
F
2
3
-1
3+
INJURY
RIGHT OR LEFT (circle one) vSKI AREA
R
L
Equipment Information
SKI MAKE
vMODEL
vLENGTH
SERIAL No.
vRENTAL I.D. No. (if applicable)
BOOT MAKE
vMODEL
BOOT SOLE LENGTH in mm
vRENTAL I.D. No. (if applicable)
BINDING MAKE
vMODEL
TOE VISUAL INDICATOR (DIN) SCALE
vHEEL VISUAL INDICATOR (DIN) SCALE
vSIZE
to
to
RENTAL FORWARD PRESSURE (SYNCHRO) SETTING(S):
Equipment Inspection/Tests
Right Ski/Binding/BootLeft Ski/Binding/Boot
N/AYESNO (check one)N/AYESNO (check one)
Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards
Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards
All boot parts present, working correctly
All boot parts present, working correctly
AFD OK and intact
AFD OK and intact
Forward Pressure correct
Forward Pressure correct
Toe Height correct
Toe Height correct
Toe Wings set correctly
Toe Wings set correctly
Brake fully functional
Brake fully functional
Ski damaged (bent etc.)
Ski damaged (bent etc.)
System passes visual inspections
System passes visual inspections
Rental heel forward pressure setting correct
Rental heel forward pressure setting correct
VISUAL INDICATOR SETTINGS
VISUAL INDICATOR SETTINGS
Toe: Heel:
Toe:Heel:
S TEP 7
Equipment Inspection/Tests
Section
• Refer to the most current Shop
Practices Manual for Standard
Boot Sole information.
• Equipment inspections should be
conducted on the equipment “as
is”.
• Inspection of binding adjustments should be in accordance
with recommendations set forth in
the most current Shop Practices
Manual.
• System visual inspections should
be in accordance with recommendations set forth in the most current Shop Practices Manual.
• Mechanical inspection tests should
be conducted at room temperature.
• The mechanical testing device
should be properly calibrated and
operated in the manner recommended by the device manufacturer.
• Mechanical tests should be conducted on the equipment “as is”.
• Test results should be recorded in
Newton meters.
Post Accident Ski Equipment
Inspection Report
CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I
II
III
I
II
III
COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I
II
III
I
II
III
FORWARD LEAN MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*FORWARD LEAN MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I
II
III
I
II
III
* Record the number of results recommended by the manufacturer of the testing device. If not certain, record 3 values for each test.
Facility/Personnel/Testing Device
SHOP NAME
REPORT REVIEWED BY
vDATE
vINSPECTION TECHNICIAN
vDATE
vTESTING DEVICE BRAND
v­MODEL
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Binding Maintenance
& Repair
Photo: Alexander Klun. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.
Maintenance & Repair > 32
All Salomon bindings have
replaceable AFDs
Maintenance & Repair
Any incorrect use of a Salomon part or accessory or i­nstallation of a non-compatible brand accessory with a
Salomon system will automatically void both the warranty and indemnification for that system.
Retail & Rental Guidelines
Retail Guidelines
Salomon bindings require a minimum of maintenance to enhance
performance and their useful life.
They should be cleaned, inspected
and lubricated prior to each season
and every 30 skier days per season
as follows:
• Inspect all components for damage or excessive wear. Repair or
replace damaged or excessively
worn parts and/or c­ omponents.
• Clean the exposed areas of the
components with a cloth or rag.
Wipe any dirt or grit from the
binding housings, heel track and
the region under the heel cup. Do
not use solvents or high pressure
liquid cleaning systems to clean
bindings.
• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.
#000905) or the equivalent to the
lubrica­tion points indicated for
the appropriate model. Do not use
silicone or penetrating oils unless
the lubricant is specifically approved.
• C
lean the exposed areas of the components with a cloth or rag. Wipe
any dirt or grit from the binding
housings, heel track and the region
under the heel cup. Do not use solvents or high pressure liquid cleaning systems to clean bindings.
• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.
#000905) or the equivalent to the
lubrication points indicated for each
model. Do not use silicone or penetrating oils unless the lubricant is
specifically approved.
• R
eplace the heel on the track.
• This should be followed by periodic
in-season inspections and when a
binding looks particularly dirty or if
visual inspection reveals that something may be wrong. This helps
to ensure that all components are
functioning correctly.
• R
ecommend to the skier that
routine maintenance and inspections be performed by a Salomon
Authorized Dealer. This will help
ensure that any problem that
may develop with the system can
be detected and corrected by a
trained technician.
Rental Guidelines
Proper maintenance of rental systems
includes a complete inspection of the
entire rental inventory prior to the ski
season. Bindings should be cleaned,
inspected and lubricated in the following manner:
• Inspect all components of each
set for damage or excessive wear.
Repair or replace damaged or excessively worn parts and/or components.
• Remove the heel by sliding the housing off the rear of the heeltrack*.
Never attempt to interchange any SR,
SC or retail toe baseplates or heel
tracks with other model baseplates or
heel tracks.
Cants > Acceptable Use
Note
Salomon bindings should not be altered in any way except as explicitly outlined in this manual.
The use of cants with Salomon bindings is acceptable, provided:
• The cants are of a high grade material designed for this use.
• The cants are installed in a professional manner.
SPM 11 EN.indb 32
Rental Post Season Storage
To prepare rental equipment for summer storage:
• All binding visual indicator adjustments should be reduced to the lowest setting. Do not attempt to adjust
the release setting below the lowest
setting as damage may result.
• The binding heels should be stored
in the closed position.
• The equipment should be stored in
a cool, dry and ventilated area away
from direct sunlight.
• Proper screw penetration into the
ski meets current norms.
• The cants do not impede the binding’s function as it was designed,
including proper function of the
brake.
*To remove heel pieces on tracks
with heel locks, loosen the rear
mounting screws at least three
turns. Pull the heel piece back­ward
while lifting it up over the heel
lock. To replace the heel pieces,
follow the removal proce­dure in reverse and tighten the rear mounting screws securely.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Maintenance & Repair > Guidelines > 33
Maintenance & Repair > (continued)
Screw Extractor/Repair Kit
A
Salomon offers a Screw Extractor/
Repair Kit (Ref. #000878) to remove/ replace broken binding
mounting screws. The kit comes
with two different length bits and
a quantity of repair plugs. Fig. A
Repair plugs may be ordered separately.
Stripped Screw Holes
Follow instructions for the installation of repair plugs (below).
ment to let the shavings escape.
Use caution not to hit the broken
piece.
Broken Screw or Broken Tap
Removal
When a screw or tap breaks in a
ski, it must be removed to avoid
further damage. It can be removed
as follows:
Continue to drill until the chuck
touches the bushings of the jig.
This is the correct drilling depth
of 10 mm.
Fit the extractor drill bit into the
electric drill with the shoulder
touching the chuck.
Turn the ski over and hit the base
lightly to remove all shavings.
Position the appropriate jig onto
the ski with the jig bushing directly
over the broken screw or tap.
Drill slowly around the broken
piece using an up-and-down move-
Remove the broken piece inside the
extractor bit with a pair of pliers.
Follow instructions for the installation of repair plugs (below).
Installation of repair plugs
The existing hole may need to be
widened using an 8 mm diameter
bit, however do not drill more than
10 mm deep.
Place a drop of glue onto the top
of the hole.
Tap a repair plug into the hole with
a hammer until it is flush with the
topskin of the ski.
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
Re-mount the binding.
Clean the extractor bit after each
use.
000905 Salomon Grease
000878 Screw Extractor/Repair Kit
000846 Repair Plugs
AFD/SCP Replacement
TZ 5, TZ 5 SC & LZ 7-8-9 Anti Friction Plate Replacement
S
D
F
G
OR
NI
JU
H
!
JUN
IOR
A
1.Insert a 6-8 mm wide screwdriver
at the front of the plate. Fig. A
2. Move over the screwdriver to
eject the plate. Fig. S
3.Place the new plate and hand clip
it. Fig. D & F
Junior Performance AFD Upgrade
TZ 5, TZ 5 SC, TC45 bindings were
developed to fit both adult and junior
boot standards, and are delivered with
a universal junior pedal which has
been validated by dealers and the TÜV
organization. Salomon also offers
a specific Junior Performance AFD
(ref. 89267001) upgrade meant to
increase slope performance for junior
specialists, which can be exchanged
with the universal one. NOTE: The replacement junior pedal (red) must be
used only with junior boot standards.
Other Models
1.
2.
3.
4.
SCP Reference Numbers
SPM 11 EN.indb 33
Caution: for models with elastic pedal
(range 08), check the presence of the
elastic block under the pedal. Fig. H
Reference
Page #
Section Name
47
Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
54834001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Universal AFD
89267001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Junior AFD
Salomon Control Pedal Replacement
Dismount the toe piece from the interface or from the ski.
Remove the AFD from the toe piece baseplate.
Position the replacement AFD on the baseplate and press it into place.
Remount the toe piece.
SCP Ref. N° Binding / System
78830001
914 FIS 20 / 914
Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12 Ti SC,
Z10 Ti Axe+, Z10 TI, 78830101
Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti SC, Z10, 710 Ti, 710 SC,
710, 710 ITF.
78829401
Smartrak Prolink +914
Smartrak Prolink &
78829501
Smartrak Control+ Z14,
Z12, Z10, 711
Smartrak Prolink &
78829601
Smartrak Control+ Z12
Ti, Z10 Ti, 710 Ti
Fig. G Specifically, it may only be
used with junior boots with a toe
thickness of 16.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
Note
For instructions on replacing the
AFD on Quadrax models, please refer
to the 2006-2007 Salomon Shop
Practices Manual
For instructions on replacing the AFD
on Spheric Performance and S710 Ti
Spheric models, please refer to the
2005-2006 Salomon Shop Practices
Manual
All Salomon bindings have replaceable
SCPs. The specific SCP item numbers
can be found in the Salomon Spare
Parts catalog (page 70), though some
SCP Reference Numbers are listed in
the chart below..
Replacement procedures for SCPs
are as follows.
For Toes mounted on Interfaces and
Skis (Smartrak Grip/Grip Plus, SC,
and ITF)
1. Dismount the Toe piece from the
Ski or The Interface by completely
loosening the mounting screws.
2. Dismount manually the SCP on
the Toe piece.
3. Take the new SCP and mount it
manually under the Toe piece.
4. Tighten the Toe piece on the ski or
the Interface (4Nm torque).
For Toes mounted on Smartrak
Prolink/Control/Response
1. Put the Toe Piece out the
Interface.
2. Dismount the Toe piece from the
Set by completely loosening the
mounting screws.
3. Dismount manually the
SCP+Stirrup on the toe piece.
4. Take the new Set SCP+Stirrup and
mount it manually under the Toe
piece.
5. Tighten the Toe piece on the
Stirrup (4Nm torque).
6. Remount the Toe piece on the
Interface.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Certification Program
Certification > Exam > 34
Photo: Mattias Fredriksson.
The technician who signs the Authorized
Location’s workshop or rental form for any
transaction must be currently Salomon
alpine binding certified
Technician Certification Exam
2010/2011 Technician Certification Exam Questions
Do not write on this form. Indicate answers on the Registration Form.
A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. In addition, questions 12 to 25 are
considered core questions and must be answered correctly.
1Indemnified Bindings are:
a) Those that appear on the 2010/2011 Schedule of Indemnified Bindings
in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual.
b)The 2010/2011 models only.
c) Not something a technician needs to know about.
d) Any Salomon binding still in use.
6
When is the forward pressure correct on the ZZ LAB and STH 12, 14 & 16.
a) When the boot in the binding, adjust DIN number.
b) Place boot in binding and center with mid boot mark.
c) When the boot is in the binding and the top of the head screw is
aligned with the back of the heel track.
d) Thereís no need for adjustment it is automatic.
2
7
Mechanical inspections of rental equipment:
a) Ensure that all components are functioning properly.
b) Are required periodically in-season.
c) Are required pre-season .
d) All of the above.
8
Workshop or Rental Forms must:
a) Be kept on file for 5 years or for the statute of limitations.
b) Be signed by the customer and the Certified Technician.
c) Be used for every transaction.
d) All of the above.
3
4
Salomon Technician Certification:
a) Never has to be renewed. Once you’ve past the exam.
b) Is valid whether or not the employer is a Salomon Authorized Alpine
Binding Dealer.
c) Is valid for 2 years from the exam date and may be transferred
between Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers.
d) Does not require that Certified Technicians be familiar with Salomon
Bindings through hands-on experience.
What is Skier Type?
a) Unnecessary information. b) A classification system based on “cautious,” “moderate,” or
“aggressive” skiing preferences.
c) The degree of skill a skier possesses.
d) A person who enjoys skiing.
When a skier picks up their equipment from your shop make sure:
a) You wish them luck.
b) You only hand it over to the intended user.
c) Someone explains the use of the equipment to them and provides
them with signed copies of the Workshop/Rental Form and Liability
Release Agreement.
d) They speak with the technician who did the installation/adjustment.
5A mechanical testing device:
a) Never needs re-calibration.
b) Requires properly trained technicians for consistent results.
c) Gives consistent results even when it is operated incorrectly.
d) Is only used in rental shops.
SPM 11 EN.indb 34
9A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report form:
a) Is a critical tool in defending liability claims.
b) Must be completed each time an accident is reported.
c)Answers A and B.
d) Is only necessary in the case of lower body injuries.
10If the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a
boot do not agree, you should:
a) Not install the binding.
b) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to
position the jig on the ski.
c) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski.
d) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks.
11 When adjusting the toe height on Salomon Quadrax (Leisure) bindings,
you should:
a) Use a Salomon rental adjustment tool for the toe height screw.
b) Check your adjustment with a Salomon toe height card.
c) Answers A & B.
d) None of the above; toe height adjustment is automatic.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Certification > Exam > 35
Technician Certification Exam > (continued)
2010/2011 Technician Certification Exam Questions (continued)
12 What should the initial visual indicator setting be for a 220 lb, 6’5”,
Type 3+ skier who is 25 years old and uses boots with a sole length of
310 mm?
a) 11 b) Ask the customer.
c) Not possible to determine. d)12
13 When testing the toe for elastic travel and return, the boot should:
a) Elastic travel only occurs while skiing and cannot be tested in the
shop.
b) Move off center at least 5 mm and return to within 2 mm of its original
position.
c) Move slightly off center then release completely.
d) None of the above.
14A skier weighs 165 lb and measures 5’8” tall. He is a Type 1 skier who is
59 years old. What is his Skier Code on the Chart?
a)H
b)J
c) L d) K
15 When mounting bindings, Salomonís recommendation for tapping is:
a) Always tap.
b) Always tap unless the manufacturer cautions against it.
c) Never tap. Itís too easy to damage the ski or break the tap.
d) If you countersink the holes with the drill bit, there is no need to tap.
16 Skiers requesting personal settings higher or lower than are indicated by
the 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart should:
a) Be given the settings they want provided they sign a Requested
Setting Release Agreement.
b) Be asked if they wish to identify themselves as Type 3+ or Type -1 and
use the indicated settings.
c) Be instructed to adjust their bindings themselves.
d)Answer A or B.
17A six year old is being fitted for her first pair of skis. She weighs 42 lb.
What Skier Code would you use to help determine the visual indicator
setting of her bindings?
a) B b)A
d)3/4
c)-1
18A boot is considered incompatible with a Salomon binding if:
a) It does not pass visual inspection.
b) There is more than a I mm difference in sole flatness across its width.
c) It does not conform to Standard Boot Sole Dimensions.
d) All of the above.
19If the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a
boot do not agree, you should:
a) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to
position the jig on the ski.
b) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski.
c) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks.
d) Not install the binding.
20If the forward pressure indicators on the heel are not aligning properly
you should:
a) Ignore it if they are close.
b) Remove the boot and move the heel forward or back to correct.
c) Make sure (adjustable) toe wings and toe height are correct.
d)Answers B & C.
21You are testing a used boot-binding system on a mechanical testing
device. The Salomon binding has a visual indicator setting of 6 and the
boot sole is 320 mm long. What is the In-use Range for twist?
a) 58 Newton meters
b) 58 to 78 Nm
c) 43 to 78 Nm
d) 50 to 67 Nm
22If there are no manufacturerís recommendations for drill bit selection
you should:
a) Drill the ski with the bit in your drill, you can’t go wrong.
b) Use a 3.6 mm bit, you can always increase the torque on the screwshooter.
c) Drill one hole with a 3.6 mm bit and check for metal before switching
to a 4.1 mm bit.
d) Always use a 4.1 mm bit, all mounting platforms contain metal.
23 What is the correct maintenance procedure for Salomon binding?
a) Cleaning all exposed area of the components with a cloth or rag,
cleaning binding housing, heel tracks and apply grease.
b) You may use any solvent or high pressure liquids to clean bindings.
c) Bindings are self cleaning and do not need maintenance at any time.
d) None of the above.
24 What should the visual indicator setting be for a skier who weighs 69 kg,
height 152 cm, boot sole length 310 mm, skier type II, age 52?
a)3
b)3.5
c)4
d)4.5
25Examples of Salomon bindings that may be used with both junior & adult
boot sole norms are:
a) 607 & 608
b) STH 12 & STH 16
c) TZ 5 & C305
d) You canít use an adult norm sole with a Salomon junior binding.
On-line Registration Instructions
Applying technicians must complete the 2010/2011 Salomon on-line certification registration and test.
A score of at least 90% (23 correct answers) must be achieved to pass the exam. Applying technicians are
not certified until a passing score is achieved.
• U.S. dealers will find the on-line certification registration and test at:
http://www.salomoncertification.com
• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for
each Registration and Exam submitted on line
at www.salomoncertification.com
SPM 11 EN.indb 35
• The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/
Exam submitted by mail or fax to Salomon,
or for technicians certified by any approved
industry training program.
Fax: (801) 334-4502
Salomon Certification/ Customer Service
Salomon USA
2030 Lincoln Ave
Ogden, UT 84401
• Canadian dealers will find the on-line
certification registration and test at:
http://www.salomonhookup.ca
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
Adjustment Chart > 36
Torque Range
Initial Toe/Heel Indicator
Skier
Weight
lb
kg
Height
ft-in/cm
Twist Forward
Lean
by Boot Sole Length (mm)
Skier
Code*
<>231251271291311331230 mm 250 mm 270 mm 290 mm 310 mm 330 mm 350 mm 351 mm
2229
1013
A
3/
4
3/
4
3/
4
3038
1417
B
1
3/
4
3/
4
3947
1821
C
4856
2225
D
5766
2630
E
6778
3135
F
7991
3641
G
92107
4248
108125
<- 4'10"
<- 148 cm
REF.
11/2 11/4 11/4
In-use Range
2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART
Inspection Range
(Newton Meters)
5
18
8
29
3/
4
11
40
1
14
52
17
64
20
75
23
87
27
102
31
120
2 13/4 11/2 11/2 11/4
21/2 21/4 2 13/4 11/2 11/2
3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 13/4
31/2 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2
H
31/2 3
49- 4'11"-5'1"
57 149-157 cm
I
41/2 4 31/2 31/2 3
37
141
126147
58- 5'2"-5'5"
66 158-166 cm
J
51/2 5 41/2 4 31/2 3
43
165
148174
6778
5'6"-5'10"
167-178 cm
K
61/2 6 51/2 5 41/2 4
50
194
175209
79- 5'11"-6'4"
94 179-194 cm
L
71/2 7 61/2 6 51/2 5
58
229
>210
>95
M
81/2 8
67
271
N
10 91/2 81/2 8 71/2
78
320
O
111/2 11
91
380
105
452
121
520
137
588
>- 6'5"
>- 195 cm
P
* Based on "Type 1" Skier
SPM 11 EN.indb 36
3 23/4 21/2
7 61/2 6
10 91/2 9
12
11 101/2
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Binding
37
Technician Certification Answer Form
2010/2011 Technician Certification Answer Form
This form is for U.S. dealers only.
Get all your certification needs
at www.salomoncertification.com
Fees
On line certification test:
$12
Faxed or mailed test:
$20
Technician & Store Information
Exam Date
Technician’s Name (PRINT CLEARLY)
Store Account #
Store Name
Shop Phone #
Store Address
Instructions
Please print clearly your information above and fax or mail your Certification Answers to (801) 334-4502.
A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass.
In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and must be answered correctly.
Please circle your answer for each question.
All answers must be clearly marked. Any partially circled answers could be marked incorrect.
Answer Section
abcd
a b cd
a b c d
a b c d
a b cd
a b cd
a b c d
a b c d
abcd
a b cd
a bcd
a b c d
a bcd
a b c d
abcd
a b cd
a b cd
a bcd
abcd
a bcd
a bcd
a bcd
a bcd
a b c d
a b cd
Mail or Fax To:
Salomon Certification
Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave., Ogden, UT 84401
Fax: (801) 334-4502
Phone: 1 (800) 654-2668
SPM 11 EN.indb 37
Technicians Signiture
Signiture Date
10/14/10 4:28 PM
ALPINE SKI
38
Photo: Hal Thomson. Skier: Rick Armstrong.
Technical reference for the
complete line of current
Salomon alpine skis
SPM 11 EN.indb 38
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Technical Features > 39
Adult Ski Length Selection
For the Salomon skis, find the corresponding centimetre length for your weight.
Add to that number any additional length from the boxes below according to your ability, aggressiveness, the snow conditions you ski most of the time and the kind of skis you want to choose.
WEIGHT
Kg
Corresponding
SKI LENGTH cm
< 47
48 - 52
53 - 58
59 - 65
66 - 73
74 - 82
83 >
140 cm
145 cm
150 cm
155 cm
160 cm
165 cm
170 cm
LEVEL
+
1. BEGINNER
2. INTERMEDIATE
3. ADVANCED
4. EXPERT
5. SPECIALIST
You are skiing the first
week (rental skis)
Able to ski most runs
in good conditions
Able to ski all runs
in good conditions
Able to ski on all runs
in any conditions
Able to ski on all runs in
changing conditions
Discover first ski sensations
Prefer moderate speeds
Prefer a variety of speeds
Prefer high speeds
Prefer highest speeds
- 20 cm
- 5 cm
+ 0 cm
+ 5 cm
+ 10 cm
TERRAIN
+
Most of the time on groomed piste or on hard snow conditions
Most of the time off piste or on soft snow conditions
+ 0 cm
+ 5 cm
KIND OF SKI
+
SKI
SKI
3V Powerline; 24 Hours; 24 Daytona; 24 Hours Powerline S5;
24 Hours Powerline S3; Select Touch; Vital Touch; Fresh Touch
2V Powerline; Crossmax; 24 Hours Powerline LM; 24 Hours
Powerline S1; 24 X / 24 GT Pro / 24 Sport; X-Wing; Rocker / Czar
/ Shog un / Lord / Knight; El Dictator / Sentinel / Twent y Twelve;
Pro Pipe / Suspect / Threat; Geisha / Lad y / Maï Taï / Vamp;
Origins Diamond, Origins Opal, Origins Topa; Origins Pearl / Origins Amber
- 1 cm
=
+ 4 cm
TOTAL
This total centimetre length is a guide, your preferred length will be the ski closest to the recommended total.
Junior Ski Length Selection
Ski length (and binding) according to weight and height of children*
Child Height
Child Weight*
Approx.
Age
of Child
XW Fury Junior XS
102861
Jade Junior XS 102868
24 Junior 111236
XW Fury Junior S
102860
Jade Junior S 102867
24 Junior 111236
XW Fury Junior M
102858
Jade Junior M 102866
24 Junior 111237
XW Fury Junior L
102857
Jade Junior L 102862
24 Junior 111237
85 to 95 cm
95 to 105 cm 105 to 115 cm 115 to 125 cm 125 to 135 cm 135 to 145 cm 145 to 155 cm 155 to 165 cm 165 to 175 cm
10 to 14 kg
14 to 18 kg
70 cm
80 cm
18 to 22 kg
22 to 26 kg
26 to 30 kg
90 cm
100 cm
110 cm
100 cm
110 cm
Beginner
3 to 7
Intermediate
years old
Good
Beginner
3 to 7
Intermediate
years old
Good
T5
80 cm
37 to 45 kg
120 cm
130 cm
45 to 55 kg
55 to 65 kg
140 cm
150 cm
T5
T5
90 cm
T5
T5
T5
Beginner
6 to 10
Intermediate
years old
Good
T5
T5
T5
120 cm
120 cm
T5
T5
130 cm
T5
130 cm
L7
L7
L7
Beginner
8 to 15
Intermediate
years old
Good
140 cm
6 to 12
Intermediate
years old
Good
110 cm
T5
L7
140 cm
150 cm
110 cm
120 cm
130 cm
110 cm
120 cm
130 cm
140 cm
120 cm
130 cm
140 cm
Beginner
Shogun Junior 111203
Mai Tai Junior 111204
30 to 37 kg
Skiing
Aptitude
T5
T5
T5
T5
L7
L7
T5
L7
L7
L7
L7
150 cm
L7
L7
140 cm
L7
L7
L7
Example for Shogun Junior / Mai Tai Junior: a 6-year-old child weighing 25 kg (and measuring 120 cm), skiing at an intermediate level, must choose a 115 cm ski with a “TZ5” binding.
*If weight is over 45 kg (142 Ibs), SALOMON strongly recommend to use an ADULT ski.
SPM 11 EN.indb 39
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Technical Features > 40
Drill Bit Selection For Salomon Skis
Ski Model
Equipe T, XW Fury Junior,
Jade Junior, Shogun Junior,
Mai Tai Junior
All other models
(except those above)
Ski Size
< 140 cm
Drill Bit Diameter Tapping
3,6 mm
No
>= 140 cm 4,1 mm
All sizes
4,1 mm
Glue*
Torque
No
3 Nm (for these skis, use a hand screwdriver
only to tighten the screws on the bindings.)
Salomon glue
4 Nm
or epoxy
No
*Put the glue at the bottome of the hole
Recommendations For Use of Skis According to the Mass of Skier
To guarantee the sufficient parameters of safety (i.e. the resistance of
the screws to wrench), skiers must
use skis, approximate with groups 1
to 4, in connection with the mass of
the skier**.
Group of Ski
1
1, 2
1, 2, 3
(1, 2) 3, 4
Skier Weight (kg)
greater than 65 kg
65 kg or less
45 kg or less
25 kg or less
**Extract from NF ISO 8364 June 2007
Ski Technical Reference Chart
SPM 11 EN.indb 40
Sandwich Sidewalls
Monocoque
Edgy Monocoque
Twintip
Full
Full Woodcore
Composite
All Mtn. All Mtn. Powerline
Bamboo layer
Basalt layer
3D Race Frame
Double Double Ti Laminate
Wider Edges
Total Edge Reinforcement
Edge Armor
Race Base
4000
4000 Ptex
XL (85) XL (85) Chassis (mm)
Body (mm)
4000
L (79)
4000
L (79)
4000
L (79)
4000
M (75)
2000
M (75)
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
S (72)
Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
S (72)
Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Protrak
•
Z12
Protrak
•
Z12
Protrak
•
Z11
Smartrak
•
Z10
Smartrak
L10
Lightrak
Double
Z12
Double
Protrak
Double
Z12
T
Double
Protrak
T
Carbon
Double
Z14
T
T
Double
Protrak
T
T
Double
Z12
Full
Protrak
Race
Z14
Full
Lightrak
Race
L10
Full
Lightrak
Race
L10
•
Lightrak
Full
C
Z10
Race
C
Smartrak
Full
C
Z11
Platinum
Single
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Single
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Double
T
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Double
Double
T
Single
Full
Titanium
Protrak
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•
Z12
T
•
Protrak
•
Z12
Full
Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail;
All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Full
T
•
•
Double
Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail;
All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Double
System
T
Double
Binding
•
2000
H 24 Sport +
JL10 B80
Protrak
Specific Features
Other
Single
K 24 GT Pro +
Z10 B80
Base
Single
K 24 Daytona +
Z11 B80
Z12
Full
K 24 Hours +
Z12 B75
Edges
Race
K 24 X +
Z12 B75
49.5
50.2
51.0
51.8
52.5
53.2
54.0
54.8
44.4
45.0
45.6
46.2
44.4
45.0
45.6
46.2
47.4
48.3
49.2
50.1
47.4
48.3
49.2
50.1
47.4
48.3
49.2
50.1
46.0
45.8
47.5
48.3
49.0
260
270
280
290
260
270
280
290
T
Full
K Crossmax +
Z12 B75
47.0
47.7
48.5
49.3
47.0
47.7
48.5
49.3
46.3
47.1
47.9
48.7
49.5
47.1
47.9
48.7
49.5
47.1
47.9
48.7
49.5
•
ON PISTE: Race / Allround
K 3V Race Powerline +
Z12
2130
2230
2330
2430
1850
1950
2050
2150
2000
2070
2140
2210
2280
1990
2060
2130
2200
1710
1780
1850
1920
1760
1880
2000
2120
1740
1860
1980
2100
1620
1725
1830
1935
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
2180
2250
2320
2390
2300
2400
2500
2620
2300
2400
2500
2620
2130
2230
2330
2450
1900
1980
2080
2180
1900
1980
2080
2180
1900
1980
2080
2180
1720
1790
1860
1930
2000
1575
1680
1785
1890
1995
1535
1640
1745
1850
1955
•
K 3V Race Powerline +
Z14 B75
706
744
781
816
706
744
781
816
633
668
704
740
776
668
704
740
776
668
704
740
776
645
685
725
766
645
685
725
766
642
678
713
749
599
642
678
713
749
680
721
752
783
680
721
752
783
638
663
690
720
638
663
690
720
645
687
730
774
645
687
730
774
645
687
730
774
611
648
686
725
765
606
641
676
712
748
606
641
676
712
748
Magnesium Magnesium Titanium
K 2V Race Powerline +
Z12
14.0
15.6
17.4
19.3
14.0
15.6
17.4
19.3
11.4
12.9
15.6
16.3
18.2
12.9
15.6
16.3
18.2
12.9
15.6
16.3
18.2
12.0
13.6
15.3
17.2
12.0
13.6
15.3
17.2
12.2
13.2
14.1
15.1
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
15.1
16.0
17.0
17.5
19.0
16.0
17.0
17.5
19.0
11.2
12.0
12.5
13.2
11.2
12.0
12.5
13.2
12.1
13.6
15.1
16.8
12.1
13.6
15.1
16.8
12.1
13.6
15.1
16.8
10.4
11.7
13.1
14.6
16.3
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
C
Alium
K 2V Race Powerline +
Z14
109
110
111
112
109
110
111
112
104
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
105
106
107
108
101
102
103
104
101
102
103
104
100
101
102
103
99
100
101
102
103
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
99
101
103
105
99
101
103
105
99
101
103
105
101
102
103
104
105
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
3D Race 3D Race 3D Race 3D Race
H X-Wing 4 +
JL10 B80
82
83
84
85
82
83
84
85
76
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
77
78
79
80
73
74
75
76
73
74
75
76
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
70
71
72
73
70
71
72
73
70
71
72
73
69
70
71
72
73
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
Reinforcement
Waist
Width
3D Sport
H X-Wing 6 +
JL10 B80
163 127
108788 170 127
119924 177 127
184 127
163 127
127
111687 170
177 127
184 127
152 120
159 120
111127 166 120
173 120
180 120
159 120
120
111135 166
173 120
180 120
159 120
120
119981 166
173 120
180 120
152 120
120
111136 160
168 120
176 120
152 120
120
111137 160
168 120
176 120
151 114
115
111139 158
165 116
172 117
144 113
151 114
111140 158 115
165 116
172 117
164 112
112
120030 171
178 112
185 112
164 112
112
111101 171
178 112
185 112
155 117
118
120031 160
165 119
170 120
155 117
118
111104 160
165 119
170 120
154 119
119
111113 162
170 119
178 119
154 119
119
111100 162
170 119
178 119
154 119
119
111116 162
170 119
178 119
148 119
155 119
111118 162 119
169 119
176 119
144 115
151 116
111120 158 117
165 118
172 119
144 115
151 116
111741 158 117
165 118
172 119
Construction & Core
3D Sport
H X-Wing 8 +
KZ10 B80
Weight (g per 1/2 pair)
K XW Storm +
Z11 B80
Midsole (mm)
N XW Tornado Ti
Radius (mm)
K XW Tornado Ti +
Z12 B80
Tail (mm)
ALL-MOUNTAIN SKIS: X-Wing
K XW Tornado Ti Pl +
Z12 B
Waist (mm)
N XW Enduro
Tip (mm)
K XW Enduro +
Z12 B90
Length (cm)
Ref. and
Commercial Designation
Option
Rocker Shape (mm)
MEASUREMENTS
SIDECUTS
Thickness
TECHNICAL RECAP
•
•
•
•
•
•
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
MEASUREMENTS
SPM 11 EN.indb 41
Lightrak
Lightrak
L9
Full
•
•
C
•
C
•
C
•
C
•
C
•
Single
L9
C
Lightrak
225
250
300
210
210
210
•
•
•
•
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
2000
T
4000
Z10 Ti
•
4000
Lightrak
2000
Z10 Ti
T
2000
•
G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
Protrak
G1 ISO Norm
G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
Z10 Ti
•
C
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm
G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
4000
Full
Full
Full
Sandwich
•
•
Pulse Pad; Twin Rocker FS; G1 ISO Norm
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; Women Stance
(Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
Tip Protector
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
Tip Protector
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
Tip Protector
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
Tip Protector
W T A
4000
N Vamp
Lightrak
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm
Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T A
4000
N Mai Tai
L9
•
Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T A
4000
N Lady
C
Lightrak
Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (>– 85 mm)
W T
2000
N Geisha
Lightrak
Single
H Origins Amber +
JL9 B80
Z10 Ti
Single
N Origins Pearl
Lightrak
Single
H Origins Pearl +
JL9 B80
C
Z10 Ti
L9
W T
W T
•
Single
H Origins Pearl +
JL9 B80
Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T A
Single
N Origins Topaz
•
G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (>– 85 mm)
Full
WOMEN: All-Mountain
H Origins Topaz +
KZ10 Ti
W T A
Full
H Origins Opal +
KZ10 Ti B
Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
Full
K Origins Diamond +
Z10 Ti
46.3
47.1
47.9
48.7
W T A
W T
•
H Fresh Touch +
JL9 B80
•
•
H Vital Touch +
KZ10 Ti B8
Pulse Pad; High Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T
•
WOMEN: On piste
H Select Touch +
KZ10 Ti B
•
•
N Threat
•
•
•
N Suspect
C
•
N Twenty Twelve
112
112
112
116
116
116
115
115
115
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
104
105
106
107
100
101
102
103
100
101
102
103
100
101
102
103
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
114
116
118
112
113
114
115
115
115
112
112
112
112
•
•
FREESKI: Park & Pipe
N Dumont Pro Pipe
112
•
•
N The Knight
Flat Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T
Double
•
N Lord
38.3
40.0
44.7
54.9
20.6
23.1
25.9
28.7
13.6
15.4
17.4
19.5
14.2
16.3
18.5
19.6
15.7
18.0
20.5
17.6
19.7
21.9
13.0
15.1
17.3
18.5
19.7
14.0
14.2
16.3
18.5
19.6
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.4
12.9
15.6
16.3
10.5
12.0
13.6
15.3
10.5
12.0
13.6
15.3
10.5
12.0
13.6
15.3
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
18.5
20.6
23.1
11.9
13.6
15.4
13.0
15.1
17.3
14.0
14.2
16.3
18.5
•
•
N Shogun
115
118
121
123
116
118
120
122
113
114
115
116
Pulse Pad; Square Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
W T
L (79)
581
626
670
670
250
300
350
400
210
210
210
210
105
108
111
114
97
99
101
103
85
86
87
88
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
91
91
91
86
86
86
86
86
85
85
85
85
85
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
72
73
74
75
72
73
74
75
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
95
97
99
84
85
86
86
86
86
85
85
85
85
W T
4000
2020
2120
2220
2318
1852
1944
2040
2140
1690
1790
1890
1990
1560
1660
1760
1800
1785
1885
1985
1785
1885
1985
1560
1650
1740
1790
1840
1285
1560
1660
1760
1800
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
1515
1620
1725
1830
1935
1750
1820
1890
1960
1620
1740
1860
1980
1620
1740
1860
1980
1360
1480
1600
1720
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1150
1255
1360
1465
1570
1410
1515
1620
1725
1830
1640
1852
1944
1590
1690
1790
1560
1650
1740
1283
1560
1660
1760
166 125
128
111143 174
182 131
190 133
164 126
128
102732 173
182 130
191 132
161 128
128
102735 169
177 128
185 128
151 122
122
107490 161
171 122
176 122
161 122
111146 171 122
181 122
163 123
111147 171 123
179 123
151 122
161 122
111148 171 122
176 122
181 122
141 122
151 122
102752 161 122
171 122
176 122
144 115
151 116
111161 158 117
165 118
172 119
144 115
151 116
111163 158 117
165 118
172 119
144 115
151 116
111165 158 117
165 118
172 119
152 120
120
111150 159
166 120
173 120
144 120
120
111156 152
160 120
168 120
144 120
120
111154 152
160 120
168 120
144 120
120
118469 152
160 120
168 120
137 112
144 113
111416 151 114
158 115
165 116
137 112
144 113
111157 151 114
158 115
165 116
137 112
144 113
118468 151 114
158 115
165 116
137 112
144 113
111159 151 114
158 115
165 116
153 124
102734 164 126
173 128
153 128
102748 161 128
169 128
151 122
111170 161 122
171 122
141 122
122
102753 151
161 122
171 122
•
M (75)
745/775
780/810
816/846
853/883
730
770
810
850
706
748
791
835
713/738
740/775
820/855
851/886
796
845
895
803
843
882
692/742
742/792
792/842
817/867
842/892
666/691
713/738
740/775
820/855
851/886
614
649
684
720
756
614
649
684
720
756
614
649
684
720
756
633
668
704
740
614
653
693
733
614
653
693
733
614
653
693
733
581
607
650
686
721
581
607
650
686
721
581
607
650
686
721
581
607
650
686
721
690
730
770
664
706
748
692/742
742/792
792/842
666/691
713/738
740/775
820/855
N Czar
•
4000
720
M (75)
290
4000
840
M (75)
111691 192 147 127 137 48.5
2000
N Rocker
Pulse Pad; Flat Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
S (72)
270
280
290
300
2000
1900
2000
2100
2200
119
120
121
122
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
W T
S (72)
715
754
792
832
93
94
95
96
C
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
17.8
19.8
21.1
24.3
129
129
129
129
Lightrak
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
S (72)
N Sentinel
170
111145 177
184
191
L10
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
2000
300
Specific Features
Other
S (72)
2600
•
Double
856
•
Single
111144 194 139 114 124 43.4
Smartrak
Full
N El Dictator
Z10
Full
1680
1785
1890
1995
•
T
Full
641
676
712
748
•
Full
72 99 12.8
72 100 13.9
72 101 14.8
72 102 15.7
•
Full
116
117
118
119
Protrak
•
H 24 Hours Pwline S1+
L10
151
111694 158
165
172
Z12
Magnesium Titanium
1790
1860
1930
2000
Alium
648
686
725
765
•
•
11.7
13.1
14.6
16.3
T
•
•
ON PISTE: Japanese Demo
FREESKI: Exploring
FREESKI: Big Mountain
K 24 Hours Pwline S3+
Z10 B
70
71
72
73
Base
Sandwich Sidewalls
3D Race Monocoque
Edgy Monocoque
Twintip
•
Full
Full Woodcore
Composite
Alium Magnesium Titanium Race Powerline
Bamboo layer
Basalt layer
3D Race Frame
Single
Double Double Ti Laminate
Wider Edges
Total Edge Reinforcement
Edge Armor
Race Base
2000
4000
4000
4000 Ptex
Chassis (mm)
Body (mm)
45.8
47.5
48.3
49.0
119
119
119
119
Protrak
Dbl. 3D Sport
•
102
103
104
105
155
111467 162
169
176
Z14
•
•
Thickness
44.4
45.0
45.6
46.2
47.4
48.3
49.2
50.1
Edges
Double
•
Weight (g per 1/2 pair)
2300
2400
2500
2620
1900
1980
2080
2180
Reinforcement
Double
•
Midsole (mm)
638
663
690
720
645
687
730
774
•
•
Radius (mm)
11.2
12.0
12.5
13.2
12.1
13.6
15.1
16.8
System
Tail (mm)
102
102
102
102
99
101
103
105
Construction & Core
Waist
Width
Binding
Waist (mm)
67
67
67
67
70
71
72
73
Length (cm)
155 117
K 24 Hours Powerline LM+ 120033 160 118
165 119
Z14
170 120
154 119
K 24 Hours Pwline S5 +
162 119
111471
170 119
Z12
178 119
Ref. and
Commercial Designation
WOMEN: Freeski
Option
Tip (mm)
SIDECUTS
Rocker Shape (mm)
TECHNICAL RECAP
Technical Reference > 41
•
C
•
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
RENTAL: Junior Rtl
RENTAL: Women Rtl R: Freeski
FR Crossmax 120 +
L10 SC B
111209 125 112 78 102 10.5
556
1580
713/738
740/775
820/855
851/886
581
607
650
686
721
581
607
650
686
721
585
635
1560
1660
1760
1800
1550
1655
1760
1865
1970
1150
1255
1360
1465
1570
1460
1560
L10 SC
ITF Loc
1240
1360
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
FR 24 Jr R S +
T5 SC
FR 24 Jr R XS +
T5 SR
FR XW Fury Junior L +
L7 S
100
111820 100
110 103
70 91
111824 80 96
90 100
107
111815 140
150 108
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
84 7.0
86 7.5
75 4.5
79 5.0
83 5.5
88 13.0
89 14.0
405
450
300
330
365
585
635
980
1000
760
800
890
1460
1560
T5 SR ITF Loc Junior
FR XW Fury Junior M+
T5 SC
106 65
111822 120
130 107 65
86 9.5
87 11.0
485
535
1240
1360
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
FR XW Fury Junior S+
T5 SC
FR XW Fury Junior XS +
T5
FR Jade Junior L+
L7 SC
100
111821 100
110 103
70 91
111825 80 96
90 100
107
111816 140
150 108
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
84 7.0
86 7.5
75 4.5
79 5.0
83 5.5
88 13.0
89 14.0
405
450
300
330
365
585
635
980
1000
760
800
890
1460
1560
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
T5 SR ITF Loc Junior
FR Jade Junior M+
T5 SC
106 65
111818 120
130 107 65
86 9.5
87 11.0
485
535
1240
1360
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
FR Jade Junior S+
T5 SC
100
111819 100
110 103
70 91
111826 80 96
90 100
84
86
75
79
83
405
450
300
330
365
980
1000
760
800
890
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
SPM 11 EN.indb 42
L10 SC
ITF Loc
L7 SC ITF Loc Junior
T5 SC ITF Loc Junior
L7 SC ITF Loc Junior
L7 SC ITF Loc Junior
T5 SR ITF Loc Junior
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1840
C
1840
C
1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840
C
1840
C
1840
C
4000
M (75)
C
2000
S (72)
•
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Mat Top Sheet
(only C/O version is concerned); Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
2000
S (72)
•
Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Mat Top Sheet (only C/O version is concerned);
Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
2000
M (75)
Sandwich Sidewalls
3D Race 3D Race 3D Race 3D Race Monocoque
Edgy Monocoque
Twintip
Full
Full
Full
Full Woodcore
Composite
Powerline
Bamboo layer
Basalt layer
3D Race Frame
Double Double Double Double Ti Laminate
Wider Edges
Total Edge Reinforcement
Edge Armor
Race Base
1840 4000 4000 4000 4000 Ptex
Chassis (mm)
Body (mm)
•
•
•
•
•
•
ITF Loc
485
535
FR Jade Junior XS+
T5 SR
•
Lightrak
86 9.5
87 11.0
7.0
7.5
4.5
5.0
5.5
•
C
106 65
111817 120
130 107 65
65
65
65
65
65
•
ITF Loc
•
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
4000
L10 SC
C
FR 24 Jr R M +
T5 SC
NR Origins Crystal R
14.2
16.3
18.5
19.6
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
13.0
14.0
L10 SC
C
ITF Loc
FR 24 Jr R L +
L7 SC
FR Origins Crystal +
L10 SC
112
112
112
112
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
88
89
L10 SC
C
151 122
122
111217 161
171 122
176 122
137 112
144 113
111216 151 114
158 115
165 116
137 112
144 113
102820 151 114
158 115
165 116
107
111814 140
150 108
NR The Knight R
85
85
85
85
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
65
65
Lightrak
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
4000
NR 24 Sport R
C
W T
G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
4000
FR 24 Sport R +
L10 SC B80
•
Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
2000
RENTAL: On piste
HR 24 GT Pro R +
Lightrak
C
Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
2000
FR XW Focus +
L10 SC B80
C
•
Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
4000
NR X-Wing 6 R
C
Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
S (72)
FR X-Wing 6 R +
L10 SC B80
C
Specific Features
Other
G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
4000
RENTAL: All-Mountain
HR X-Wing 8 R +
Lightrak R
Base
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
S (72)
N Mai Tai Jr
Edges
1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840
N Shogun Jr
Reinforcement
•
JUNIOR: Freeski Jr
N Jade Junior XS
C
•
N Jade Junior S
C
•
N Jade Junior M
C
•
N Jade Junior L
C
•
N XW Fury Junior XS
C
•
N XW Fury Junior S
106
102858 120
130 107
90 100
102860 100 100
110 103
91
102861 70
80 96
140 107
102862 150
108
106
102866 120
130 107
90 100
102867 100 100
110 103
91
102868 70
80 96
110 92
99
111203 120
130 106
140 122
110 92
99
111204 120
130 106
140 122
144 120
152 120
102808 160 120
168 120
176 120
137 112
113
111328 144
151 114
158 115
111218 165 116
172 117
137 112
144 113
102815 151 114
111212 158 115
165 116
172 117
111331 125 112
135 113
116
111467 145
155 119
165 122
119391 175 123
144 115
151 116
111205 158 117
165 118
172 119
144 115
151 116
111207 158 117
165 118
172 119
144 115
151 116
111208 158 117
165 118
172 119
C
•
JUNIOR: All-Mountain Jr
N XW Fury Junior M
C
•
N XW Fury Junior L
C
•
N 24 Jr
Lightrak
3D Sport
JUNIOR: On piste Jr
N 24 Jr
L10 Jr
3D Sport
1360
1460
880
1000
1100
1200
400
440
530
620
640
1100
1200
880
1000
530
620
640
400
440
1100
1200
880
1000
530
620
640
400
440
715
905
1095
1285
715
905
1095
1285
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100
1550
1655
1760
1865
1970
2075
1150
1255
1360
1465
1570
1675
1580
1690
1800
1910
2020
2130
1495
1600
1705
1810
1915
1635
1740
1845
1950
2055
1235
1340
1445
1550
1655
3D Race
585
635
485
535
585
635
300
330
365
405
450
585
635
485
535
365
405
450
300
330
585
635
485
535
365
405
450
300
330
487
532
577
666
487
532
577
666
606
645
685
725
766
573
599
642
678
713
749
573
599
642
678
713
749
556
545
595
645
695
755
606
641
676
712
748
606
641
676
712
748
606
641
676
712
748
13.0
14.0
9.5
11.0
13.0
14.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
7.0
7.5
13.0
14.0
9.5
11.0
5.5
7.0
7.5
4.5
5.0
13.0
14.0
9.5
11.0
5.5
7.0
7.5
4.5
5.0
19.5
17.0
15.5
14.0
19.5
17.0
15.5
14.0
10.5
12.0
13.6
15.3
17.2
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
15.1
10.5
11.4
12.2
13.2
14.1
15.1
10.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
11.9
12.8
13.9
14.8
15.7
Lightrak Jr
•
88
89
86
87
88
89
75
79
83
84
86
88
89
86
87
83
84
86
75
79
88
89
86
87
83
84
86
75
79
84
91
98
112
84
91
98
112
100
101
102
103
104
98
99
100
101
102
103
98
99
100
101
102
103
102
93
96
100
103
107
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
98
99
100
101
102
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
76
78
80
85
76
78
80
85
72
73
74
75
76
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
78
74
74
74
74
74
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
L10 Jr
•
•
107
117955 140
150 108
120 106
130 107
111237 140
107
150 108
70 91
80 96
111236 90 100
100 100
110 103
107
102857 140
150 108
11.5
11.9
•
920
980
•
525
560
•
88 10.0
91 10.5
•
105 63
111306 130
137 108 63
Smartrak Grip
•
H 3V Race Jr +
JL10 Jr B80
H 24 Jr +
JL10 Jr B80
Z11
•
905 12.8
1050 13.64
•
595
630
Lightrak Jr
•
93 11.0
96 11.5
Smartrak Grip
•
110 64
120037 144
151 112 64
Z11
L10 Jr
•
J 3V Race Jr +
Z11 B75
870 12.65
970 13.5
1060 14.6
850 10.9
935 11.6
1020 12.45
•
625
660
695
540
575
610
•
Midsole (mm)
17.0
17.0
17.5
14.0
14.0
14.0
•
Radius (mm)
84
86
88
80
83
86
•
Tail (mm)
64
64
64
63
64
64
System
Waist (mm)
101
103
105
96
101
104
Construction & Core
Waist
Width
Binding
Tip (mm)
H 2V Race Jr +
JL10 Jr B80
151
120035 158
165
130
111304 137
144
J 2V Race Jr +
Z11 B75
Thickness
Length (cm)
Ref. and
Commercial Designation
Option
Rocker Shape (mm)
MEASUREMENTS
SIDECUTS
Weight (g per 1/2 pair)
TECHNICAL RECAP
Technical Reference > 42
Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repair > 43
Maintenance & Repairs
Ski maintenance
Good ski maintenance is just as important for the recreational skier as for the racer. A fine-tuned ski lasts
longer. A well-prepared ski turns better, grips the snow better and glides better on all types of snow.
The ski tune-up involves three steps:
1.Daily check-up - at the end of everyday of skiing.
2.Machine tuning - for quick work.
3.Complete hand tuning - for skier’s specific needs.
Check-up
• Visually check to see if any rust
has developed on the edges.
• Remove any traces with fine,
220-230 grit sandpaper.
• If necessary, sharpen and polish
edges using sandpaper wrapped
around a file.
• Clean the base and wax with
Swix wax.
Machine tuning
S
A
D
Ski check-up
• Visually check to determine what needs to be tuned.
• Remove major deep scratches on edges with whetstone (see page 44 for repairing).
• Remove any traces of wax or grease.
Fa
Fb
Fill in any holes in the base
(see base repairs on page 45)
Depending on the conditions of the base and materials available:
a) Grind entire base surface. Fig. A
b) Fill-in scratches with base repair material.
c) Repair any large damaged areas with base patch/die.
Stone grinding the ski base
Surface Smoothing
Grinding
Rotation speed
1000 t/mn
Pressure 2,5
Ski feed speed
10 m/mn
Dressing
Dressing rate
9 - 12 mm/s
(depending on the condition of the ski)
Semi Finishing
Grinding
Rotation speed
800 to 900 t/mn
Pressure 2,5
Ski feed speed
10 m/mn
Dressing
Dressing rate
4 - 16 mm/s
Finishing
Grinding
Rotation speed
400 to 500 t/mn
Minimum Pressure
Ski feed speed
10 - 11 m/mn
Dressing
Dressing rate
7 - 8 mm/s
Dressing speed
Dressing speed
Dressing speed
Micro automatic
(1300 t/mn)
(1300 t/mn)
(1300t/mn)
Values from Wintersteiger machines (Micro 81 – Micro 91) or equivalent machines.
Ski tuning on beveled/recessed edges
Parameter of the
Beveled edge
machine
Program 1
Angle 1°
Program from Wintersteiger machine (Trim Disc).
SPM 11 EN.indb 43
Recessed edge
Angle 1°
Stone grinding
For Prolink skis, install the Binding-Bridge kit according to the
Maintenance Specifics paragraph on page 44.
a) Surface smoothing
– Place the skis on a flat surface.
– Eliminate any excess polyethylene on the base with a hand base
plane to decrease the risks of
contaminating the stone.
b) Semi Finishing
– Stone grind until the base becomes flat and glossy.
– Avoid overheating and use of a
dirty stone (lengthwise streaks on
base are from stone contaminant).
– Dress the stone regularly to keep
it in good condition (when using a
belt grinding machine: use 80 grit
belt).
c)Finishing Fig. S
– Stone grind to obtain a fine structure (when using a belt grinding
machine: use 150 grit belt).
– Do not use a dirty stone which
creates fluff/hair.
d) Beveled/recessed finish
For skis with beveled/recessed finish,
we recommend a straight, fine
stone-ground structured base.
Note: always make the last run in this
direc­tion: Tip – Tail. Concerning
the machine parame­ters, consult
the machine manufacturer.
Edge finishing
We recommend grinding the edges
with a cup grinding wheel. Fig. D
• Check the angle adjustment beforehand.
• Make sure the stones are well
lubricated.
• Make sure the edges are not
burnt (brown color).
• Check the tuning lengths.
• Smooth the edges by hand with
a soft stone (Fig. Fa) or Scotch
Brite® (Fig. Fb)
• Make sure all burrs are removed
and smooth down again, if necessary.
For non equiped retailers they
can do a classic tuning.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repair > 44
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Machine tuning (continued)
G
Lateral finish (Fig. G):
• Lateral finishing with lubricated
220 belt (or use the smallest grit
possible).
• Pass over the edges 1-2 times
depending on the condition of the
edges.
K
H
• A double sided sharpener will
maintain the ski’s proper side cut.
• For a performance preparation,
polish the base edge with a pol­
ish­ing stone or whetstone to
elim­in­ ate any file marks on the
edges.
L
J
• Remove burrs and polish edges
with a lubricated Scotch Brite®
belt machine at a slow speed.
Fig. J
• Be careful to lubricate sufficiently
to avoid burning the base.
:
• Carefully remove all burrs with a
soft stone.
• Quickly wipe the ski to avoid
staining from the dried lubricant.
A well-sharpened ski is always
sharper underfoot than at the
extremities of the ski.
Tools:
• Wax remover
• Iron with thermostat
• Wax applicator
• Plastic scraper
• Brush
Waxing, scraping and brushing
a) Waxing (Fig. K)
- It’s best to use melted wax.
- Clean the base thoroughly.
- Make sure the iron is set at the appropriate temperature so that only
the wax is melted. (Temperature
110 °C +/- 5 °C or 230 °F +/10 °F).
Excess heat (above 120 °C or 248°F)
can be harmful to both wax and ski,
and can even cause permanent loss
of glide qualities in the base.
- Choose a wax according to the wax
manu­facturer’s recommendations.
- Melt the selected wax over the entire length of the base, and let the
wax cool to room temperature.
b) Scraping (Fig. L)
- Remove the excess wax with a
plastic scraper from tip to tail to
leave only a very thin layer.
- Remove wax from the base groove
and ski edges as well.
structure desired) working from tip
to tail.
- A rotating brush removes the structure of the base for good glide.
Strap the skis together. Position the
straps at the base contact points.
c) Brushing (Fig. :)
- Brush the base with a nylon brush
(or other type depending on the
Note: The skis can be stored readywaxed (unscraped) for an extended
period of time (e.g. between ski
seasons).
Hand tuning
A true bar is the basic tool for
checking and assessing:
• ski base flatness,
• that the edge is slightly recessed
from the base,
• the extent of base scratches and
appropriate repair. The edge angle
checking tool is used to verify
that the edge has an angle of 90°.
Ski check-up
• Check the base and edges of your
skis with a true bar.
• If repairs are necessary, see instructions on page 45.
Smoothing the base
and edges (Fig. D)
Classic finish: If damage is only minor, use a file to tune ; otherwise the
ski must be tuned on a machine.
Beveled/Recessed finish: the
recommended bevel is between 1°
and 1.5°.
Edge sharpening (Fig. D)
• Sharpen base edges.
• Sharpen side edges.
On classic finish: make sure the
edges are at 90°.
Cleaning the skis > Warning
Pressurized cleaners are prohibited, as well as the following solvents:
› Acetone
› 95° alcohol
(due to risk of damaging the cosmetics of the top surface of the ski).
SPM 11 EN.indb 44
On Beveled/Recessed finish: make
sure that the beveled and recessed
edge angle is between 1° and 1.5°.
• Round off the tip and tail slightly.
• Remove any burrs with soft stone
or Scotchbrite®.
Polishing the edges
Polish the edges with a whetstone,
starting first on the base and then
the sides.
Waxing, scraping and
brushing
Follow the same instructions as in
machine tuning.
Tools:
- Square
- 20 cm (8 inch)
file
- Whetstone
- Soft stone
- Scrapers
- Brushes
- Scotchbrite®
- Sandpaper
(220-320 grit)
- Central holding vise
- Swix wax
De-tuning the edge angle at
the extremities
Important: After all finishing operations (by hand or machine) it is
essential to remove any burrs from
edges and to polish the edges to
ensure good ski performance.
Maintenance specifics > Prolink adapter
Tuning skis with prolink on automatically programmable machines and machines with a lead:
To be able to tune skis with the Y
and V prolink, we have developed
a specific tuning kit in cooperation
with the Wintersteiger company.
This new Prolink adapter can
be mounted on the adjustable
Wintersteiger bridge (ref. 2000:
7217-0111-V01) and is available at
Wintersteiger under the reference
7217-0111- V05.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repair > 45
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Repairing the surface of skis and snowblades
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
11
12
There are two methods for
repairing the ski surface:
1) ‘One colored’ paste + Araldite®
2) ‘Multi colored’ Araldite® + white
+ coloring
Repair process:
1. With a cutter, outline the area
to be repaired, then cut the top
surface. Fig. A
2. Result after cutting the top surface. Fig. S
3. With a cutter, score area to repair (fibers) to improve bonding.
Fig. D
4. To protect top surface, put adhesive tape around the area to
repair. Fig. F
5. Prepare Araldite® resin with gun.
6. Which type of repair to choose:
a) One-color surface repair
b) Multicolored surface repair
7. Add a small quantity of coloring paste to the Araldite® resin.
Gently mix (in order to avoid
The TPP top surface
All the adult and Rental models are
protected by the TPP (Transparent
Polyamide Protection). Regarding
the Junior models, they are
protected by TP (Transparent
Protection).
The transparent tops cover the
cosmetics underneath, which
guarantees the durability of the
cosmetics.
SPM 11 EN.indb 45
bubbles) to obtain a homo­ge­
neous mixture. Add a small
quantity of coloring paste (White
DW 0131) to the Araldite® resin.
White paste is used as a primer
in order to have the desired
colors afterwards. Gently mix (in
order to avoid bubbles) to obtain
a homo­ge­neous mixture. Fig. G
8. Apply thicker than top surface of
the ski in the areas to be filled.
Wait a few moments to eliminate
bubbles if necessary. Fig. H
9. Put adhesive tape on the area to
avoid running. Let it dry for 12
hours. Fig. J
10. After 12 hours of drying, remove
the adhesive tape from the mixture. Do not remove the adhesive tape around the area which
protects the top surface from
scratches. Use the flat side of a
cutter to scrape off the excess
mixture. Fig. K
Base repairs
Superficial scratches
Machine tuning will make the
scratch disappear (see the ski maintenance repair)
11. Smooth it down with 600 grain
sand paper. Remove the adhesive tape. Fig. L
12. Finish sanding gently in order
to obtain a smooth surface. Be
careful of the ski’s decor/cosmetics.
16. Using a dust-free cloth, wipe off
the excess Araldite® to obtain
a smooth, even surface. Let it
dry for 30 minutes. The repair is
12
finished. Fig. ●
Create a decoration
13. For the coloring stage, do not try
creating tone on tone to create
the exact color of the ski. Trying
to reproduce a motif of the ski
design already present elsewhere is better and easier. The
final layer of Araldite® tends to
lighten colors. Fig. :
14. Use the Araldite® gun for a
varnish finish which will protect
the ski surface from cuts from
the edges. A small quantity of
Araldite® is sufficient.
15. Apply a fine layer of Araldite®
with a cutter to avoid excessive
11
thickness. Fig. ●
Not very deep scratches or
marks to be filled by machine
- Pour the polyethylene.
- Wait 10 minutes for the material
to harden.
- Remove the excess polyethylene
with a steel spatula for a flat surface.
- Proceed with machine tuning.
Materials needed:
• Araldite® 2011
• Araldite® gun 50 ml
• Araldite® coloring paste for
smooth color (DW 0131 White,
DW 0133 Red, DW 0137 Black,
DW 0132 Yellow, DW 0134 Green,
DW 0135 Blue)
• White paste for undercoating
for decoration (DW 0131 White)
• Felt pen to color the design,
type 3 points, permanent
(Ref: Pantone 87828 color number).
Accessories:
• Cutter
• Adhesive tape
• Towel
• Sand paper, Grain 600
Deep cuts
- Cut out the damaged area with the
base patch die.
- Cut a piece of the base material
with the base patch die.
- Glue it into the damaged area.
- Hold it in place with a clamp and
press repair (glue the pieces with
Loctite® 406 or slow Araldite®).
- Proceed with machine tuning.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repair > 46
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Replacing the tip protector
A
a
S
D
b
F
J
G
H
a
2007/2008 Rental Tip Protector
“Triangle” tip protector (fig. Aa).
“Hexagonal” tip protector
(fig. Ab).
1. Check that the tip protector is on
the right position (Salomon logo
on top foil side (fig. S).
2. Set up the tip protector on the
lateral groove with a rubber hammer (fig. D&F).
3. Set up the tip protector on the
central groove (fig. G).
4. Finish the mounting on the second lateral groove with a rubber
hammer (fig. H).
Others rental models use
rental tip protector range 05
”Triangle” tip protector (fig. Ja).
“Hexagonal” tip protector
(fig. Jb).
1. Insert the tip protector on
the ski.
2. Place the 2 screws in the 2 holes
face the running base and screw
on (1N.m).
b
Replacing edges
A
S
F
G
D
Repair process:
1. Verify that the ski can be repaired.
2. Remove the binding and clean
the ski.
3. Check the length of the edge to
be replaced. Fig. A
Cut out the base where the
edge must be changed (10 mm
beyond) with the base patch die
or cutter (in this case, make a
reproducible cut-out). Fig. S
4. Cut the 2 sides of edges between two wings with 45°
angle, as illustrated.
5. Cut out the edge carefully with
cutter or wood chisel, then
roughen the area with 80 grit
sandpaper. Fig. D
6. Cut the new edge, trim it and
remove the grease.
SPM 11 EN.indb 46
7. Place the new edge and screw
2 wings near the tip.
Wedge in place in order to
maintain a good profile and
keep the edge horizontal.
Fig. F
8. Apply epoxy to affected area
and heat slightly with heat gun,
concentrating on each wing.
9. Put plastic over cut out area
and insert piece of new base
material.
10.Cover the affected area with
mold release paper and place
ski in heat press. Fig. G
11.When the epoxy has cured,
remove the ski from the heat
press and remove base patch
and plastic film.
12.Reapply epoxy to the affected
area.
13.Carefully insert piece of base
material into cut-out area.
14.Cover affected area with mold
release paper and place ski in
heat press.
15.When the epoxy has cured,
remove the ski from the heat
press.
16.Grind base and edge locally.
17.Plane patch area to obtain
proper geometry with base
plane or file.
18.Repair any damage to top layer
with a mixture of epoxy and
colorant.
19.Tune and wax the ski.
Materials
• screw (wood, 1,5 x 15 mm)
• epoxy
• epoxy colorant or methane glue
• mold release paper or PE film
• base patch die (KT Technic)
• cutter, ruler
• scale model drilling machine with
cutting disc
• narrow screwdriver
• heat gun
• wood chisel
• repair press 200 mm length
• base plane Wintersteiger, file
• belt grinder
• stone grinder
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
S90190 Standard Salomon edges
for all skis
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
47
Photo: Christoffer Sjostrom. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.
Technical reference
for the complete
line of current
Salomon alpine
boots
Standard Boot Norms
Standard Boot Sole Dimensions > ISO 5355
The Alpine boot soles are standardized and bindings are designed accordingly.
The standard norm concerns not only the shape and dimensions as illustrated, but also the friction coefficient of the area of the sole which is in contact with the anti-friction plate on the binding.
In practical terms:
The boot manufacturers who display
one of the following markings:
DIN, ISO, ÖN, UNI guarantee that they
use standard norms.
In the absence of any of these, check
first with the boot manufacturer. These
boots are designed for use with a pair
of classic skis, and not with a monoski, snowboard or skiboard.
It is the skier’s own responsibility if (s)
he chooses to take the additional risks.
When a pair of used boots is brought
in, make sure that any worn parts are
still within the norm.
Legend (measurements in mm)
A
B
C
D*
F
E
G
E
F
G
H
I
RA
RB
RC
RD
Adult boot
69 ± 2
70
70
100 (L < 300 mm)
120 (L >= 300 mm)
5±1
19 ± 1
30 ± 2
30 ± 1
4±1
41.5 ± 3.5
18 ± 1.5
±4
4037min.
36.25 ± 0.75
Junior boot
62 ± 2
65
50
80 (L < 240 mm)
90 (L >= 240 mm)
3±1
16.5 ± 1.5
25 ± 2
1,5
27.5max.
±2
3±1
35 ± 3
16 ± 2
27 ± 3
34.5 ± 1
*L = boot sole length
Boot Toe
RB
RA
A
5 min.
B
7±1
1,5
max.
F
E
(bottom view)
G
40 min.
(side view)
Boot Heel
RC
RD
I
H
6 min.
8±1
(side view)
A
D
C
(bottom view)
Boot Modification
Any performance or fit modification of a boot that could effect the function between the boot and binding should be inspected to verify that the
boot meets Standard Alpine Boot Norms. Mechanical Inspection is recommended after any such modification.
SPM 11 EN.indb 47
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Standards & Technical Features > 48
Technical Features
Boot sole lengths
MODELS
X3 LAB
X3 RC CS / X3 10 CS /
X3 CS / GHOST / SHOGUN /
POISON / X3 JR PRO / X3 JR
MISSION RS / DIVINE RS
MISSION / DIVINE
pro Model/Kaïd/Keira/
KAos/Kreation
IMPACT / IDOL / IMPACT JR
CHARM
FOCUS
FOCUS GT
X3 60
T3
T2 / Team
T1
PERFORMA / IRONY
SYMBIO RENTAL
15
208
16
17
208
18
223
19
20
21
240
240
247
257
240
223
240
247
259
22
22.5
MONDOPOINT SIZES
23
24
25
23.5 24.5 25.5
275 285 295
26
26.5
305
27
27.5
315
28
28.5
325
29
29.5
265
274
285
295
305
315
326
336
268
268
278
277
288
288
298
298
308
307
318
317
328
328
338
339
267
277
287
297
307
317
327
337
267
265
267
277
267
266
277
274
277
277
277
276
287
286
287
297
287
285
297
295
297
297
295
296
307
307
307
317
307
306
317
327
317
317
327
337
267
263
277
275
287
284
298
296
307
306
319
317
329
326
30
30.5
31
31.5
32
32.5
33
33.5
358
350
358
360
378
378
337
347
357
337
337
357
357
357
357
339
336
349
345
359
380
380
Last Recap Per Concept
Models
X3 LAB
X3 / Instinct
Impact / Idol
Mission RS / Divine RS
Mission / Divine
Charm
Quest
Focus
95 mm
Last
•
98 mm
Last
100 mm
Last
102 mm
Last
104 mm
Last
106 mm
Last
108 mm
Last
Custom Shell
Custom Shell
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rental: Intelligent Color Coding
S
A
Rental : global solution provider.
Available on all Salomon Rental
boots.
Color coding on the boots (Fig. A)
matches the Synchro Center toe
piece markings (Fig. S).
Color Coding Per Concept Size
Color Code
Black
Green
Yellow
Orange
Red
Purple
Blue
274-288
289-304
305-318
319-334
335-348
349-384
23/23,5 24/24,5
25/25,5
26/26,5 27/27,5
28/28,5
29/29,5 30/30,5
31/31,5
22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5
25/25,5
26/26,5 27/27,5
28/28,5
29/29,5
30/30,5 31/31,5 32/33,5
22/22,5 23/23,5
24/24,5
25/25,5 26/26,5
27/27,5
28/28,5
Boot Sole Lengths (mm) 260-273
Impact/Idol
22/22,5
267 mm
Mission RS Divine RS
277 mm
278 mm
Quest
287 mm
278 mm
278 mm
297 mm
288 mm
298 mm
288 mm
298 mm
307 mm
308 mm
308 mm
317 mm
318 mm
318 mm
327 mm
337 mm
328 mm
347 mm
338 mm
328 mm
357 mm
358 mm
358 mm
378 mm
338 mm
Focus RS/ RS W / Jp
22/22,5
23/23,5 24/24,5
25/25,5
26/26,5 27/27,5
28/28,5
29/29,5
30/30,5 31/31,5
Mission/Divine
22/22,5
23/23,5 24/24,5
25/25,5
26/26,5 27/27,5
28/28,5
29/29,5
30/30,5 31/31,5
Symbio
22/22,5
23/23,5 24/24,5
25/25,5
26/26,5 27/27,5
28/28,5
29/29,5 30/30,5
Focus GT
Warning! 1 shell length for 2 sizes
SPM 11 EN.indb 48
267 mm
268 mm
263 mm
277 mm
278 mm
287 mm
288 mm
275 mm
284 mm
22
23
277 mm
297 mm
277 mm
298 mm
296 mm
24
297 mm
25
297 mm
307 mm
307 mm
317 mm
317 mm
306 mm
317 mm
26
27
317 mm
317 mm
327 mm
337 mm
328 mm
326 mm
339 mm
336 mm
28
337 mm
357 mm
350 mm
357 mm
360 mm
345 mm
29
337 mm
30
357 mm
31
357 mm
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Salomon Foot Measurer > 49
Salomon Foot Measurer
Warning, procedure, and recommendations
Warning
Salomon developed a foot mea­sur­er
that will help you provide better customer service by being able to recommend the size that cor­re­sponds
to the dimensions (length and
width) of the skier’s feet. However,
using the measurer can never replace trying on a boot.
The volume fit can be measured in
two dimensions. The morphology of
the foot and physical sensitivity of
each individual, according to his/her
sports activities and level (comfort/­
performance ratio), are also determining factors in the choice of size.
The Salomon measurer can be used
for all Salomon footwear products
(Alpine, X-C, Hiking, In-line skates,
Snowboard) and takes into account
the two fundamental dimensions of
both feet.
› The length (main measure­ment) :
it can be read directly on 5 international size scales (US men’s/
US women’s/ UK / EUR /
Mondopoint).
› The width in direct correlation
with the length measured. The
width measurement is partic­u­larly
useful to refine the mea­sure­ment
in Mondopoint because it orients
the customer towards the .0 sizes
(narrow feet) or .5 sizes (wide
feet).
Procedure
1. Have your customer take off
his/her shoes and make sure
that he/she is wearing appropriate ski socks (size and thickness).
2. With your customer standing up, legs parallel and knees
slightly bent, make sure his/her
heels and medial side of both
feet are touching the sides of
the measurer.
3. Slowly move the length guide
Fig. A until it touches the tip
of one foot.
IMPORTANT: When you are
moving the black transversal
length guide, make sure you
don’t put any pressure on the
toes when measuring the foot.
All you need to do is to barely
touch the end of the longest
toe. Too much pressure on the
toes could lead to errors in
reading by a few millimeters.
4. Read the size written vertically
where the red line is in the window. Fig. S
For Mondopoint, you have to take
the width into account in the following manner: if the length of
the foot measured is situated in
this zone, this means the foot
measures between 260 mm and
269 mm. Then, to choose between
26.0 and 26.5, you must look at
the width scale Fig. D (in this
case, make it correspond to the
maximum foot width with size 26).
D
S
A
F
A foot that measures 261 mm
would fit in size 26.5 (wide foot),
whereas a foot that measures 268
mm can fit in size 26.0 (narrow
foot). Fig. F
NOTE: The increases in
Mondopoint sizes represented by
two triangles in a rectangle is made
to remind you that the boot sole
lengths change at the whole sizes,
not the half sizes.
Remember that the size
indicated on the measurer
should be used to help the
dealer orient the customer
towards the proper size.
The New Salomon SIDAS Measurer
This measurer allows measures of:
• Length: real Mondopoint/french sizes/UK sizes/US sizes
• Floating width in mm with the integration of the cos18 factor to
extrapolate the length first head/fifth head.
• Precision: +/- 3 mm
• No care
The final choice as to the appropriate size should be left to the customer depending on whether he/
she prefers a snug fit or not.
In principle, a technical skier who
appreciates a snug fit will choose
the size indicated on the measurer,
while a ‘recreational’ skier will
prefer a roomier fit and will choose
one size higher.
Maintenance recommendations
Use a damp cloth to clean the measurer. It is prohibited to use chemical
agents, hot water, pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents, solvents or aerosols, which could permanently damage the plastic materials
and erase the marks.
SPM 11 EN.indb 49
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Advanced Fit > 50
Advanced Fit Technology Liner
Technical description
Liner Models
New CustomFit generation
Thermoforming
A
Thermoformable zones:
G
D
AStraight and anatomical
tongue
- A thermoformable internal side
that provides precision and
comfort.
- An external side that is more
rigid on the tibia and more sup­
ple in the flex area for excellent
pressure distribution without
hindering flex.
SOpened ankle area
For ideal morphological adap­ta­
tion regardless of the size and
shape of the bones.
Non-thermoformable zones:
DAsymmetrical and rigid cuff
Distributes pressure for instan­
ta­neous transmission of efforts.
J
F
S
H
G Specific cuts for women and
men to avoid pressure points
on the lower calf.
HMore supple zones allow for
easy entry/exit of the boot.
JForefoot – The space in front
of the metatarsal is not ther­
mo­formable, which allows the
toes to move freely.
Middle layer: For foot envelopment
and power transmission
- Thermoformable PE (CustomFit) or
self-molding PU (Autofit)or preformed PE (Thermic Fit)
suppleness
Transmission foam coming from the
Neoprene family for quick reactions.
Internal layer for foot hold:
For warmth and comfort
- Polyurethane (PU), open cell foam
envelopment, breathability, comfort
High density CustomFit foam for superior envelopment.
External layer for contact with the
shell: For pressure distribution and
thermal insulation
- Polyethylene, closed cell foam: insulation, warmth, lightness, better fit
- PVC (Thermic + Rental): protection,
ruggedness, durability
- Sensifit cuff construction for envelopment of the leg
- Supple exterior for contact with the
shell and foot envelopment
- Anatomical tongue
Women’s specific features
A
S
F
SPM 11 EN.indb 50
Best performance. Extra low
volume Compact Race liner (3
layers). Specific World Cup tongue
allowing shock absorbing.
My CustomFit Race:
Best performance. Low volume
Compact Race liner (3 layers).
Rigid sole.
My CustomFit Sport: Better customization of the tibia and ankles.
One layer liner: thermoformable
foam 70 % on original areas.
My CustomFit Comfort: Better
tibial customization. One layer liner:
thermoformable foam 60 % on basic
area (tongue).
My CustomFit Performance:
FWatertight gusset
Layer construction
External layer
Middle layer
Internal layer
My CustomFit World Cup:
Women’s liner with anatomic
tongues made of highly moldable
foams for better shin and instep
comfort in sensitive foot zones.
A Sliding band
Helps the heel slide in.
S Specific tongue
Autofit and CustomFit foams for
better shin and forefoot comfort.
D
D My CustomFit Performance
For a total CustomFit.
FPolar fleece and/or fur
Forefoot warmth.
GTherm-ic™
Better comfort on the heel, metas
& sole without altering performance. Two layers liner: thermoformable foam 80 % on all sensitive
areas (heel + metas + sole).
Old CustomFit generation
Course CF Pro / CustomFit Pro:
Autofit: Comfort, warmth,
CustomFit technology + bi-material
technology. 100 % foot hold
and contact with the shell. Due
to a specific 3 layer performance
construction.
insulation and personalized foot
envelopment. Self-molding foams
allow the liner to take on the shape
of the foot allowing anatomical
adaptation of the foot’s sensitive
areas: the tibia, ankle, forefoot and
anklebones.
ThermicFit: Comfort and warmth
- Pre-formed zones protect the tibia
and the forefoot.
- A pleasure to slip into due to its
construction and materials.
3D CustomFit / CustomFit:
Comfort, warmth and ‘customized’
envelopment. Thermoformable
foams allow the liner to take on the
shape of the foot after a heating
procedure is performed with a
special machine designed by
Salomon. + Thermoformable insole
(3D CustomFit)
AutoCF: Automoulding foam in the
foot envelopment for exceptional
comfort. CustomFit tongue for a
better tibial customization.
XFit and Biovent
Xfit Active: A comfortable, single
layer constructed thermo moldable
liner with customizable tongue
area for shin comfort and a wide
ankle area, positioned at the back
of the leg, for heel lock.
XFit Advanced: A comfortable,
single layer constructed thermo
moldable liner with customizable
tongue area for shin comfort. The
wide ankle area positioned at the
back of the leg and metas covers
all the critical foot comfort zones.
XFit Comfort: A comfortable,
single layer constructed thermo
moldable liner with a customizable
tongue area for shin and ankle
comfort.
Biovent: The very first breathable
liner in a ski boot to keep feet
warm all day. This technology
helps regulate body temperature
thanks to a multilayer construction
inspired from apparel.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Advanced Fit > 51
Advanced fit technology liner > (continued)
Thermoforming machine > Procedure
Before using the machine for the first time, return the guarrantee card to your Customer Service
Representative. Follow the instructions for the thermoforming machine closely and pay particular attention
to the rules on safety.
To guarantee good thermoforming, we have adapted a thermal sensor to our machines. If something is
abnormal during the heating process, the machine will work alternately. If this is the case, contact the customer service in your country. Do not take the machine apart.
This machine is for exclusive use with Salomon CUSTOMFIT liners. Any other use is forbidden.
Preparing for use (Fig. A-S)
S
A
WARNING
Salomon CustomFit Liners should only be heated for molding
using the Salomon CustomFit Machine. Any other unit may
cause injury by overheating.
1. Remove the machine from its
box and place it on a flat surface. Verify that the voltage
used is the same as indicated
on the machine.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Lift the nozzles using the handles provided.
4. Close the boot’s buckles and
slide the boots onto the nozzles. Make sure that the top
edge of the boot touches the
obturator.
Important: Any insoles used
other than the ones received
in the boots at the time of
purchase should be removed
before the heating procedure
begins. Re-install them after
heating to mold the liners.
5. After having read and understood the machine’s instructions, especially those on
safety, you can now plug the
machine in.
Starting the machine
F
D
Set the timer for 15 mins.
Warning: For optimal results, it is
important that:
- the heating process lasts
15 minutes. Using the machine
for more than 15 mins can damage the liner.
- operate the machine with both
boots in place.
Putting the boot on
1. When thermoforming, you
should only use ski socks that
have the following characteristics:
- socks that go higher than
the top of the boot,
- socks with at least 45% wool.
SPM 11 EN.indb 51
Wearing normal, low-cut socks
could cause skin reactions to
the heating process.
2. Remove the boots from the machine.
3. Close the hood.
4. The machine is now available
for thermoforming another pair
of boots.
5. Open the boot buckles.
6. The boots must be put on immediately following the end of
the 15 min heating cycle.
If you feel any discomfort
whatsoever when stepping-in,
take your boots off immediately.
G
7. Close the buckles with medium
pressure, not too tight. Fig. D
8. Close the strap more firmly.
9. Tap the heel on the floor to
make a good impression of the
Achilles’ heel. Fig. F
10.Wait 10 min in a standing position.
11.Remove the boots.
the 10 minute cooling process
to simulate the anklebone movements when skiing. Fig. G
› It is recommended to wait
1/2 hour before skiing with the
boots, to allow for complete stabilization of the thermoformed
liner.
Practical advice
› Salomon recommends that no
CustomFit liner be thermoformed
more than three times.
› To optimize the results of the
thermoforming process, it is
recommended that you make
several flex movements during
When drying the CustomFit liners
with a drying machine, it is important to respect the drying time
recommended by the manufacturer
and that the temperature not exceed 40°C.
Drying with a machine
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Advanced Fit > 52
Custom Shell technology
Custom Shell Thermal Forming
A new patented Kaprolene™ material has been inserted on the shell of the boot near the metatarsal area.
Simply heat the shell, step in and allow the shell to form to the contours of the feet. This personalized fit
gives unprecedented precision for improved on snow performance.
Customization Procedure
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
We recommend the use of the Sidas
bootfitting oven Fig. A. Make sure the
customer uses only ski socks which go
higher than the top of the boot.
1. Remove liners from shells.
2. Put the shells in the oven with
buckles open Fig. S.
3. Close the door and start the
machine, set the timer for 10
minutes. Warning: Make sure
to wear insulated gloves when
removing boot shells. Do not allow
customers to touch the boot,
avoiding possible burns.
4. Switch off the oven and remove the
shells.
5. Put liners back in.
6. Help the customer to step in Fig. D.
7. Close the boots with minimum
tightening (first tooth of the buckle)
and make sure the forefoot shell
seals stay in the right position.
Warning: Ask your customer to
stand still. Avoid bending or walking
with warmed shells.
8. Make sure the shell has been
fully deformed before starting
the cooling process. (It takes
approximately 2 min).
9. Cool the boots: in cold water for 6
minutes (level of water: above the
seal) Fig. F. Warning: Water level
should not be higher than forefoot
shell seals to avoid getting liners wet.
- with cold packs for 6 minutes
Fig. G.
- in snow for 6 minutes Fig. H.
- naturally for 20 minutes Fig. J.
10.Take boots off, the Custom Shell
boot is ready.
Recommendations For Experienced Bootfitters
You can use your regular heating tools
though they would be less practical
than the oven:
• heating elements Fig. K.
• gun Fig. L.
• boiling water Fig. :.
SPM 11 EN.indb 52
Warning: Kaprolene™ has been created
to be deformed by the foot’s natural
pressure. Be very careful if you need
to use a pushing machine on the
Kaprolene™ areas and NEVER push
on the sides areas where Kaprolene™
meets the PU shell.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Advanced Fit > 53
Custom Shell technology > (continued)
Custom Shell FAQ
Can the shell change forms several times? As many times as you
want! The wider the foot, the more
the shell will expand. But it won’t
come back…
Should the custom soles be done
before or after? Mold the soles
before. The customer should then
step in the warmed Custom Shell
with the insoles.
From what foot width will the
Custom Shell be useful? In size
26, from last 100 or 102 mm, the
customer will feel a real difference.
The Custom Shell is also useful for
thinner feet in order to reposition
the foot even if the change is not
measurable on the shell.
Should other areas of the shell be
changed before or after? A modification of the metatarsus’s area
can affect the positioning of the
foot. First, the Custom Shell should
be complete. Then, the areas of the
toes, ankles, and navicular bone...
can be changed as usual, though
avoid pushing on the borders of
the Custom Shell insert.
What is the maximum width the
shell can expand to? Up to 6 mm
with the push of the foot only.
What is the advantage compared
to normal bootfitting? Here, it is
the foot which changes the shell,
there is no more risk of misinterpretation, the precision is perfect.
Also, this process saves time (30
min. to do everything & the customer leaves with his/her boots)
and an easier manipulation (every
KOTF can do it).
Can I push in the Custom Shell
area with my bootfitting machine? Yes, but it is not recommended. Since the Custom Shell
material has not been created to
resist to a push that is superior the
feet’s push, avoid the side areas of
the insert.
Does the plastic retract the same
as normal boots when cooled?
Yes, but two times less than normal plastic: approximately 25%
after the boots have been taken
out (a shell pushed out 4mm could
come back to 3 mm).
What is the benefit of Custom
Shell versus the Custom Fit?
Should you do it before or after?
The work done on the shell must
be done before. This will solve
problems and last over time. The
molding of the liner must be done
after in order to put the finishing
touches on the fit.
How do I know when the plastic
is warm enough? It is the same
process as usual when done with a
manual test.
What is the ideal temperature to
form the Custom Shell? 80°C at
core of the plastic.
How many years of R&D did it
take to develop the Custom Shell
technology? 3 years.
Which is the impact of the new
material on the performance of
the boot? There is no effect because the material has the same
PU base as a normal boot. The
boot has exactly the same behavior
on snow. On the other hand, once
a boot is fit with the Custom Shell,
precision is increased.
If a customer wants an injected
liner, should it be done before or
after? In general, injection is done
before work on the shell.
I usually put normal boots in the
oven, how is Custom Shell different? The normal plastic is going to
change very little and comes back
to the original position more often.
The deformation is thus quite low.
Why is Custom Shell not used in
World Cup? In World Cup races,
one person is dedicated to each
racer; everything is done by hand
and each pair is adapted to each
discipline. Then you could say
having Custom Shell is like having
your own race technician!
Thermolight Quest Pro Pebax Liner Formatting > Procedure
1. Put on the client’s boots at
room temperature. The client
must have the sensation of
tightness in the shell.
2. Identify possible painful areas
(pressure points)
3. Protect those areas by applying
cut foam pads (not included)
directly on the foot, not the
sock.
-Be careful not to take off or
move the pads when putting
the socks back on.
4. Put the Thermolight liner without insoles in the Custom Shell
Oven for 10 minutes at 100°C
max (preferably pre-heated)
5. At the end of 10 minutes, add
insoles (original, custom or
orthopedic) in the liner and put
them into the shell.
-Take care to insert the right
liner in right shell and vice
versa (the liners aren’t
marked but differentiated only
by the shape of the sole!)
Advice: prepare one foot at a
time (preserve the liner not yet
fitted in the oven)
SPM 11 EN.indb 53
6. Put on the client, taking care
to push the client’s heel all the
way down to the liner to correctly set the heel on the bottom and thus avoid creating
bends.
7. Tighten the Quick Lace
8. Fasten the shell starting with
the forefoot buckle and making
sure to lock the backbone in the
action position.
9. Provide a clamping adapted to
the morphology of the foot:
-Strong (2nd, 3rd and 4th
tooth) for a wide foot
-Low (1st, 2nd and 3rd tooth)
for a thiner foot
Repeat the same operation for
the second liner
10.Cool down 15 minutes at room
temperature and in a natural
standing position, without exaggerating the bending on the
front.
NOTE: Salomon does not recommend the use of the Custom Fit machine (or any other similar machine) because it does not allow an acceptable and effective Thermolight liner process.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Boot Technologies > 54
Salomon Boot Technologies
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Canting Adjustment (With Lock)
Upper catches are also adjustable, with or without tools, to adapt
the volume of the upper cuff to your calves.
- To move upper catches, turn
them 90°, move them laterally
(+ 15mm), then place them
back to their horizontal position.
- To move lower catches,
loosen the screw with a 3mm
Allen wrench, position the
catches in the desired position (+/- 20mm) and tighten
the screw.
Buckle Teeth Adjustment
Offers a greater range of lower
leg adjustment (+/- 20 mm):
- Loosen the screw with a 3
mm Hexagonal Key.
- Re-tighten the screw and
buckle teeth in the new
position.
1 2 3
+2.5
+3.5
+1.5
The Canting is integrated into the
shell for reliable transmission and
protection. It allows alignment of
the cuff to the skier’s lower leg
shape.
- The factory preset position for the
canting is + 2,5°
- First, loosen the internal and
external Canting Lock with the
Hexagonal Key n° 5.
- To adjust inwards to + 1,5°
(a knock kneed stance), turn the
external adjuster one-half turn.*
- To adjust externally to + 3,5°
(a bow legged stance), turn the
internal adjuster one-half turn.*
- Re-tighten the canting lock.
*Note: Never turn both the internal
and external adjustments as this will
raise the whole cuff without adjusting
the canting.
3D Buckle Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
The 3D buckle adjustment allows the
position of the instep buckle to be
changed for personalised foot hold:
- Unscrew the buckle with a 3 mm
Hexagonal Key.
- Position the buckle over the plastic
lug on the shell.
- Re-tighten in the alternate position.
Fine tune the buckle closure by turning the part that grips the buckle teeth.
Extended Lever Buckles
Auto 3D Buckle Adjustment
Extended lever
buckles require
30% less effort
when closing.
a
b
c
d
Walkadin Pads
Walking is easy and safe, skiing
is compatible with alpine DIN
standards.
SPM 11 EN.indb 54
Without using any tools, the Auto
3D buckle adjustment modifies
the position of the instep and/or
lower leg buckle to personalize
foothold:
- Lift the buckle up a
- Hold the lock down b
- Move the buckle to the desired
position  c
- Release the lock d
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > GHOST/SPK & Impact > 55
Boot Concepts
Ghost/Pro Model
12
A
1
20
19
10
13
2
11
3
4
A
1
3
10
8
5
18
6
17
9
16
15
14
7
21
Technical description – Ghost & PRO MODEL
L oop to tongue
Shin pillow
Quicklace
Wide strap
Leather finishing
SCS (Salomon
Cushioning System)
Walkable sole
2 densities heel
cushioning system
PU lower shell and PP
cuff
Micro alu overshaped
buckles
Extra padded spoiler
My CF PRO liner with
faux fur
Nailed strap
Insole rubber grip
Absorbing footboard
PU lower shell
Double dismountable
canting
Backbone
Cuff hytrel by Dupont
M
y Custom Fit
Performance liner
Custom shell
X3 / X3 LAB
D
Technical description – X3 LAB
World Cup Advanced
Shell technology
World Cup shell
Last 95
Racing Kit
Pu either lower shell
and cuff
Flex 120 or 130
My Custom Fit World
Cup liner
World Cup claw strap
45mm
Back bone
Double dismantable
canting
4
5
A
Adjustments and personalization
World cup claw strap
- Increases cuff fastening: a more
powerful fastening for a better envelopment than a traditional strap.
- More reliable: it can’t open while
flexing the boot (both before and
during the curve).
SPM 11 EN.indb 55
Back bone
- Increases the junction between
cuff & shell for flex management
in a forward position: entering the
curve, increasing power on skis.
- Provide support and power to
skiers in a rear position while
getting out of the curve (rebound
effect): the more powerful the rebound the more back support you
need to control your skis.
6
2
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Concepts > Falcon/Instinct/Gun/Scarlet > 56
Boot concepts > (continued)
X3 CS / Instinct CS / X3 RC CS / X3 10 CS / X3 JR Pro / X3 JR
2
2
D
J
11
D
H
L
:
13
K
K
J
6
4
4
G
G
9
1
1
12
Technical description – X3 RC CS
Racing Kit Flex 130
World Cup advanced
shell technology
My CF Race Sensitive
liner.
Sensifit™ liner wings.
Lower shell and cuff
Energyzer
Canting adjustment.
Canting Lock.
World Cup claw
strap.
3D buckle.
Technical description – X3 JR PRO
Custom Sole
Adjustable buckle
teeth
Micro adjustable
buckle
Custom Shell
Backbone
World Cup advanced
shell technology
My CF Pro liner
Sensifit™ liner wings.
Lower shell and cuff
Energyzer
Canting adjustment.
360° 35mm strap
3D buckle.
Adjustable buckle
teeth
Micro adjustable
buckle
Adjustments and personalization
S
D
A
RACE Kit
Shin plate (Fig. A)
Used to reinforce the forward support and
stiffens the flex. The height and lateral
position are adjustable.
- Choose the forward or internal position
and use a 5,5 mm drill bit to drill the 1st
hole in the cuff where marked (the shin
plate is marked by a cross inside the cuff
of the boot).
- Choose the desired height and attach the
plate using the “T” insert and bolts provided.
- Align the plate correctly and use as a guide
to drill the 2nd hole and attach as shown.
SPM 11 EN.indb 56
Rear spoiler (Fig. S)
The rear spoiler (from the performance
kit) increases rear support (with 3 height
settings) and forward lean by + 2°.
- Choose the desired height and attach
using the screw provided, in the predrilled hole.
Delta H lift (Fig. D)
The 4 mm heel lift (from the performance
kit) can be used to improve instep/heel
hold and put the skiers weight forward
for faster initiation. Remove the liner and
position the wedge in the hole provided in
the rear of the Custom Sole.
Softening the Boot
Even if the flex is more progressive than
with tradtional racing boots, it can be
soften further more:
Reversible Method: Remove the canting lock screws. This reduces the flex by
5-10 %. Place the plugs from the Racing
kit into the screw holes on the outer cuff.
Non Reversible Method: This involves
cutting the ‘V’ in the top rear of the lower
shell and should be performed by your
specialized Salomon dealer.
Additional Features
Custom Sole Standard
Buckle Teeth Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
3D Buckle Adjustment
Canting Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > MISSION & DIVINE > 57
Boot concepts > (continued)
Mission RS / Divine RS
8
Adjustments and personalization
A
1
S
2
7
D
9
FOR A PERFECT FIT
H
Sensifit™ Fig. A
A soft material over the instep for
improved envelopment and easier
step-in.
Adjustable Women spoiler Fig. S
- To move the spoiler, turn the
screw 180° with a 5mm Allen
wrench.
Biovent liner
The very first breathable liner in
a ski boot to keep feet warm all
day. This technology helps regulate body temperature thanks to
a multilayer construction inspired
from apparel.
5
Additional Features
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Two Extended Lever Buckles
Canting Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
F
G
Technical description – Mission 12
Loop on tongue
Wide strap
Tool free catch
adjustment
Spaceframe shell
profile second skin
last and shell
Pads
Canting
Micro adjustable
buckles
My Custom Fit Pro
liner Biovent
Dismantable flex rivet
Mission / Divine
Adjustments and personalization
9
Romavable Rear Spoiler
You remove it by clipping
8
A
S
D
Additional Features
F
7
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Two Extended Lever Buckles
Micro Buckle Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
Technical description – Mission 6
Sensifit liner wings
Strap
Tool free catch
adjustment
3D sensifit
SPM 11 EN.indb 57
Pads
Wings sole
technology
Micro adjustable
buckle
Removable spoiler
X Fit Fusion
Advanced liner
5
H
G
10/14/10 4:28 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > IMPACT & CHARM > 58
Boot concepts > (continued)
Imapct / Idol
11
Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
A
S
A
S
10
D
F
9
8
For a perfect fit
Sensifit™ (Fig. A)
A soft material over the instep for
improved envelopment and easier
step-in.
7
For a precise transmission
Adjustable Rear Spoiler (Fig. S)
Customisation of the rear support to
suit the shape and size of the skier’s
leg and increase the rear support:
- Loosen the screw with a 5 mm
Hexagonal Key,
- Choose the height (the higher the
spoiler, the stronger the rear support),
- Tighten the screw.
5
Additional Features
Walkadin Pads
Buckle Teeth Adjustment
3D Buckle Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
Canting Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
H 12 G
Technical description – IMPACT 10 CS
Sensifit liner wings
Wide strap
Adjustable buckle
teeth
3D articulated buckle
Walkadin pads
Spaceframe shell
profile second skin
last and shell
Lower shell and
cuff energyzer
Canting
Canting lock
Micro adjustable
buckle
My CF Pro
Custom Shell
Charm
Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
S
A
6
7
A
5
8
D
F
WALK
4
SKI
Adjustable rear spoiler Fig. A
Customize the rear support to suit
the shape and size of your leg and
increase the rear support:
- Loosen the screw with a 5mm
Allen wrench.
- Choose the height (The higher
the spoiler the stronger the
rear support).
- Tighten the screw.
Oversize Sensifit™ Fig. S
The Oversize Sensifit™, designed
with supple material, offers easy
entry/exit and an optimum level
of comfort.
SPM 11 EN.indb 58
S
Ski/Walk adjustment Fig. D
The easy-to-use SKI/WALK button releases the cuff for relaxing
and easy walking. (Push the button
down for the WALK position)
Step in strap Fig. F
The Step-in strap offers the possibility to put the boot on effortlessly,
with only one hand.
3
Additional Features
Walkadin Pads
Buckle Teeth Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
Technical description – Charm 7
Wide strap
Tool free catch
adjustment
Walkadin pads
Ski/walk position
Micro adjustable
buckle
Warmest liner
Thermic prepared
Auto calf adjustment
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > Quest > 59
Boot concepts > (continued)
Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax
2
7
13
10
9
12
16
8
3
3
4
14
4
15
5
6
1
11
1
Technical description – Quest 12 & Quest PRO PEBAX
Last 100
Cushioning system
(tongue and heel pad)
Magnesium backbone
Ride & Hike body
postioning
Alpine Touring pads
Contagrip extended
rubber sole
My CustomFit Pro
liner + Biovent
Forward pressure
plate
Quicklace kit
Racing spoiler
Touring Pads
Quicklace
Ultralight
Thermoformable liner
Waterproof gusset
Pebax lower shell
Polylight cuff
A Unique & Patented Ride & Hike Technology
A
S
D
F
Alpine Back Support Management
The magnesium backbone, technology from the X3 LAB (Fig. A),
provides strong back support,
power transmission and progressive forward flex management
when skiing down (Fig. S).
Alpine Forward Flex Management
The specific inner shell (V cut-out)
(Fig. D) guarantees a wide cuff
opening when hiking or walking
(Fig. F). Combined with the inside
part of the magnesium backbone,
contributes to back support and
progressive forward flex.
New Body Positioning
15.1°
30°
Forward Lean (Fig. G)
Quest 12 boots offer 15.1° forward
lean, while Quest Pro Pebax offers
13.5° forward lean. The result is
better balance in powder and track
up snow.
SPM 11 EN.indb 59
Cuff Opening (Fig. H)
G
Quest 12 boots have a 30° cuff
opening, offering easier hiking due
to a more natural leg positioning
and a wide cuff opening on the
back when walking.
H
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > Quest > 60
Boot concepts > (continued)
Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax (continued)
Mountain Pros
Interchangeable Sole Pads
• Switch from DIN (Alpine) to touring pads
• Easy to remove & fully compatible with all the standard compliant bindings on the market
• Contagrip® material with deep studs for a perfect
arch grip in all walking conditions
If you change the pads, you have to use bindings
associated with the appropriate standard: ISO 5355
(alpine standard) or ISO 9523 (touring standard).
Ultralight Thermoformable Liner
• 280 g (for a size 26,5 boot)
• Heat moldable for a perfect foothold
Boot Concepts
A
Ultralight skin shell (Fig. A)
Second skin shell.
Women specificities
• PP Women cuff
• Women light back calf
• Specific liner: my Customfit
Comfort liner.
S
Contagrip extended rubber shell
(Fig. S)
Contagrip® extended rubber sole.
Waterproof gusset
to guarantee a perfect waterproofness.
D
Upper Buckle Walk Position
Hook: For a better walk position,
you can catch the upper buckle in
the first position (red one) (Fig. D)
Adaptable leash: if needed, you
can add a leash on your boots. A
specific buckle has been added on
the forefoot zone (Fig. F)
F
Additional Features
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Rear Spoiler
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories
Quicklace Replacement Kit
SPM 11 EN.indb 60
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > Quest > 61
Boot concepts > (continued)
Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax (continued)
Procedure > Strap Replacement
A
S
D
F
G
H
D
F
G
H
D
F
Strap replacement
1. Remove the rear Perf hold to access rivets (Fig. A)
2. Drill rivets with a Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. S)
3. Assemble new strap + plate with inserts and screws M4 (Fig. D-G)
4. Attach the rear Perf hold (Fig. H)
Procedure > Cover Replacement
A
S
Remove the cover and toe buckle teeth
1. Drill toe buckle teeth rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. A)
2. Drill cover rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. S)
Reassemble the new cover + fuel racks
3. Drill the buckle teeth shell + cover Ø 5.4 to put the M4 insert (Fig. D-F)
Attach the cover and the buckle teeth with insert with M4 screw
4. The insert must be flush with buckle teeth mounted on cover (Fig. G)
5. Mount the cover buckle teeth with M4 screws (Fig. H)
Procedure > Backbone Replacement
A
S
Backbone replacement
Mounting kit (Fig. A)
1. Remove the damaged axis by cutting off the reveting part (Fig. S)
2. Place the 2 springs in their cavities (Fig. D)
3. Do not forget to put the steel pin before screw and nut (Fig. F)
4. Mount the new backbone (Fig. G)
SPM 11 EN.indb 61
G
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Boot Concepts > Symbio > 62
Boot concepts > (continued)
Focus
3
Technical description – Focus RS
PU materials to prevent
scratches
Aluminium buckles for
lasting
Liner: mesh tested and
chosen to ensure long
lasting comfort. Biovent:
less time needed to dry
liner on the shelves
Soles: build to last and
to avoid folding with
textured effect (Salomon
patented) Kit
Oversize tool free
catch
2 buckle fastening
My AutoCustomShel
liner + Biovent
Articulated sensift for
step-in
Auto Custom Shell
technology
Rental plate for
barcode
6
A
Adjustments and personalization
F
S
Auto Custom Shell: comfort solution technology
• Directly derived from our Custom
Shell technology
• Auto Custom Shell is 100%
comfort oriented, providing
comfort benefits with no process
• Last evolution from 104 to 108
• Insert are derivated from PU,
same durability
5
Symbio™ Rental Model
6
Symbio 440
Plastic buckles
PU Shell
Replaceable toe and heel pads
5
Adjustable lower leg lever
Thermic liner
Bar code integrated to the liner
4
Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
A
Lower leg adjustment
It is possible to change the lower
leg adjustment according to the
morphology of the skier’s lower
leg.
› Adjusting the lower leg cable
- Place the lower leg cable in the
desired setting of the buckle
teeth on the medial side of the
boot. (Fig. A)
1
Longer or shorter cables are avail­
able from the spare parts catalog
(page 70) to adapt to all shapes
and sizes.
Additional Features
60
Performance Accessories
3
2
3
Repairs > Procedure
Replacing the lower leg buckle
tooth insert
1. Remove the liner and open the
cuff completely.
2. Drill the rivet inside the shell.
3. Remove the damaged buckle
tooth insert and its rivet.
4. Put a new buckle tooth insert in
place and proceed as follows :
Using a T-nut
a. Place the threaded insert in
the rivet hole on the inside of
the boot.
SPM 11 EN.indb 62
b.Put the buckle into place and
install the screw tightly. The
prongs on the threaded insert
should be completely imbedded into the cuff material.
c. Loosen the screw.
d.Put the washer into place.
This will prevent the tip of the
screw from going too far.
e. Tighten completely.
Using a Rivet. Use a rivet on the
outside and a washer inside and
proceed with riveting.
Replacing the buckle and/or forefoot buckle teeth
1. Remove the liner.
2. Drill the rivets in the buckle or
the damaged buckle teeth.
3. Remove the damaged buckle or
the buckle teeth and the rivet.
Save the washer.
4. Put in a new buckle or buckle
teeth and attach with a rivet or
T-nut.
Using a rivet. Use a new rivet
and the original washer and proceed with riveting.
Using a T-nut. Put the threaded
insert into the rivet hole from the
inside of the boot. Put the buckle
in place and tighten completely.
The prongs on the threaded insert should be completely imbedded in the material.
To remove the liner
Turn the clip on the inside of the
liner 1/4 turn with a screwdriver.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Foot Anatomy & Fit > Notions of Anatomy > 63
Foot Anatomy And Fit
Notions of anatomy
A basic knowledge of anatomy of the foot is essential if you are going to understand and solve your customers’ problems and needs since each foot is unique.
The bones of the foot
Types of legs
A.Posterior tarsus
1.Calcaneus
2. Talus (Astragalus)
3. Trochlear surface
B.Anterior tarsus
4. Navicular bone (Tarsal
Scaphoid)
5. Cuboid bone
6. 3 cuneiform bones
C.Metatarsus
7. 5 metatarsal bones
D.Toes
8. 14 phalanges
Distortion of foot when weighted
Normal knees.
Varus knees.
Some people naturally have varus or
valgus knees. The boot cuff follows
the profile of the leg. Therefore, the
boot sole forms an angle with the
ground (i.e.: the ski is not flat).
When the foot is weighted (standing
position), it can change in size:
- lengthwise, it can get 5 mm longer,
- widthwise, it can get 12 mm wider.
When the foot is flexed, we notice:
- the circumference of the ankle increases about 2 mm,
- the axis between the talus (astragalus) and calcaneus becomes
off-centered which increases the
surface area at the base of the foot.
Valgus knees.
The canting adjustment by canting
the cuff allows the boot to follow
the morphology of the leg to keep
skis flat
The ski boots can be adapted to the
shape of the leg by canting the cuff.
Therefore, to be accurate, feet should
be measured when the person is
standing with his/her weight distributed on both feet and knees slightly
flexed.
Types of feet
A deeper analysis of the customer’s feet (Fig. F) is necessary to observe
the possible deformations that can become problem areas. Salomon has
parts (page 70) at your disposal that will help you to easily adapt the
boots to these deformations.
F
High arches:
The skier needs an arch support
that can relieve pressure on ‘overloaded’ areas.
Pronated
flat foot
G
J
SPM 11 EN.indb 63
Normal
foot
H
K
Supinated
high-arched foot
Arch supports can be attached to
the footboards. (Fig. G)
Supinated or pronated feet:
This is the deviation of the foot’s
vertical axis towards the medial or
lateral side, which can lead to problems in the areas of the anklebones,
navicular bone or talus.
To adapt to this deviation of the
foot, it is possible to place wedges
directly on the footboard.
However, this wedge should only be
used if the lateral articulation under
the ankle bone is mobile. (Fig. H)
High instep:
You can grind the footboard (Falcon
and X Wave) to increase the volume. This sole is realized in grindable PU foam. To increase the
volume of the boot or to change the
position of the foot.
Caution, grind on the top surface
only. Grinding the base will effect
the interface with the Chassis. A
depth gauge is marked front and
back for even grinding. (Fig. J)
Low instep:
The height and inclination of the
footboard can be modified by
adding:
- heel lifts (Fig. K)
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Foot Anatomy & Fit > Recommendations > 64
Foot anatomy and fit > Recommendations (continued)
Recommendations & Performance Accessories
The modifications that can be made
on the Salomon boots should be
considered as the ‘final touch’ of
personalization.
Before undertaking this type of
operation, it is important to observe
certain basic rules:
- Always proceed step by step,
starting with temporary measures
before going on to permanent
changes.
- If you decide to proceed with the
permanent modifications as a
last resort, they are entirely your
responsibility.
They require the proper tools and
should be undertaken only for big
problems and by experienced specialists. For example:
- Stretching the shell.
- Grinding the liner (not recommended for manufactured liners).
- Grinding the shell.
Important: Boots whose lower
shell material is not made of
Polyurethane (PU), should not be
heated (risk of damaging the material).
Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart
Problems
Causes
Solutions
FIRST METATARSAL PRESSURE
(medial side of the forefoot)
Shell too narrow.
Prominent first
metatarsal.
Solutions all products:
› Stick adhesive foam around the first metatarsal on the medial side
of the liner.
› Stretch the shell locally with a heat gun* and other tools designed
for this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
X Wave, Ellipse, Performa: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit or
instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is a risk
of deforming it due to how thin this part is).
FIFTH METATARSAL PRESSURE
(lateral side of the forefoot)
Shell (or liner) too
narrow. Prominent
fifth metatarsal.
Solutions all products:
› Remove the insole (increases volume).
› Stick adhesive foam around the painful area to dissipate the pressure.
› Stretch the shell locally using a heat gun* and other tools designed for
this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
X Wave, Performa and Verse: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit
or the instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is
a risk of deforming it due to how thin this part is).
ANKLEBONE PRESSURE
Pain/pressure behind one or
both ankle bones.
Prominent medial and
lateral ankle bones.
Heel shape.
Solutions for Falcon, X Wave, Performa:
Special precautions are required when stretching the shell:
› heat* the inside and outside of the cuff and lower shell simultaneously (so that both will be
at the same temperature despite their different thicknesses and layers),
› place the stretching device on the inside, close the boot during the
stretching operation, and proceed with very small successive degrees of stretching to avoid creating a space between the cuff and
the shell.
Falcon and X Wave:
Be careful not to heat the metal parts (there is a risk of damaging the
plastic).
Solutions for Rear-Entry models:
› Remove the insole to increase the volume.
› Stick a C-shaped foam pad in the area around the
ankle bones (on the liner).
› Remove some foam from the liner in the area
around the ankle bones.
› Add shims to blue heel envelopment plate.
*Caution: The boots whose lower shells aren’t made of Polyurethane (PU) must not be stretched with heat (there is a risk of damaging the material).
SPM 11 EN.indb 64
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Boot
Foot Anatomy & Fit > Recommendations > 65
Foot anatomy and fit > Recommendations (continued)
Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart
Problems
Causes
Solutions
HEEL PRESSURE
Lack of room in the
boot. Prominent calcaneus (exostosis).
Solutions all products:
› Stick a chevron (foam pad in the form of an inverted V) above the
calcaneus to push the foot forward in the shell and reduce the
pressure on the heel.
› It is possible to remove some PU from both sides of the Achilles
tendon on the cuff (grinding) and/or on the lower shell
(Falcon, X Wave, Ellipse and Performa).
HEEL MOVEMENT
Very narrow heel.
Solutions all products:
› Stick a chevron above the calcaneus on the liner.
› Stick an L-shaped piece of foam under each ankle bone (for better grip).
› Add a shim to the top of the liner (forward position that pushes
the foot backward in the boot and increases pressure on the
heel).
› Use a thicker insole.
› Add a shim under the footboard.
› Add heel lifts.
Achilles tendon axis
very hollow.
Thin ankle.
INSULATION AND NUMBNESS
Cold, numb feet.
Poor blood circulation
caused by pressure
on the blood vessels/
nerves.
Poor foothold
distribution
(especially with
children).
CRAMPS
Muscle pain under the
arch, in the calf, pressure
points, irritations.
Pronounced arch,
high instep or flat
foot.
Pronated foot.
Thick lower leg.
SHIN BITE
SPM 11 EN.indb 65
Lack of pressure
distribution.
Solutions all products:
› Make sure the adjustments are not too tight.
› Remove the insoles from the liners.
› Add a small arch support and varus wedge (or a shim on the inside of the heel under
the footboard from the performance series).
› Grind the footboard.
Solutions all products:
› Add or remove the arch support.
› Add an insole or propose a custom insole.
› Remove all shims under the footboard.
› Modify the angle of the forward lean to distribute the skier’s weight differently.
› Grind the footboard.
› Grinding the Custom Sole:
To increase the volume of the boot or to change the position
of the foot. Caution, grind on the top surface only.
Grinding the base will affect the interface with the
Chassis. A depth gauge is marked front and
back for even grinding.
Falcon:
› Add a shin wedge on the cuff (choose the mounting position according to the height of the skier).
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Helmet & Pole
66
Technical reference
for the complete line
of current Salomon
helmets and poles
SPM 11 EN.indb 66
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Helmet & Pole
Helmet > 67
Helmet Technology
Helmet Technical Information
Salomon channelled all its experience for your protection and pleasure but don’t lose your head!
Our helmets combine our recognized
professionnalism and pure design to
create protection for the senses.
- Do not use any type of gasoline
products, solvents or any other
chemical substances.
- Do not modify the helmet in any way.
Do not varnish it or add any coloring
products.
- After receiving an impact, the helmet
may be damaged to the point that
it is no longer adequate to protect
the wearer’s head against further
impacts. Even if the damage is not
visible, it is necessary to replace the
helmet.
Be smart and protect your head
in style.
Examples of the main tests of norms:
Roll off Dynamic fastening
Impact test
test
device test
Covered areas
measurement
My Perfect Fit
S
!
Standards
Instructions for use and maintenance
- IMPORTANT: the helmet must always
be fastened on the head (chin strap
buckled under the chin).
- Check the adjustment and the condition of your helmet before each use.
- Always take care of your helmet,
even when not using it. Store it away
from any heat source and sunlight
(since prolonged expo­sure to the
sun weakens all plas­tic materials,
it is recommended to replace your
helmet at least every 3 years). Let it
dry in a ventilated area.
- For cleaning the outside surface of the
skull cap, use soap and water only.
Helmets don’t offer
absolute protection, so
ride within your limits
and take care.
Our comprehensive winter sport
helmet range meets applicable helmet standards and uses the unique
Advanced Fit Technology design for
your comfort and performance.
Visibility
measurement
All Salomon helmets respect the following standards :
OSFA
CE - EN 1077
(helmets for alpine skiers*) -
TÜV certified.
ASTM F2040 (helmets for recreational* snow sports).
* Non motorized winter sports
A
D
Developed with a specialized sport trauma physician
Sound System
In order to meet consumer’s
needs in terms of safety, head
hold and comfort Salomon uses
two construction technologies:
Standard technology and In Mold
technology. Both provide performance in terms of resistance,
absorption, deflecting impact and
resisting penetration.
In Mold technology: an external
PC layer molded together with
the EPS cap to provide the best
ratio lightness / resistance to the
helmet.
Injected technology: an external
cap made of ABS combined with
an internal cap made of EPS.
Fit foams: All our models are
benefiting from specific Fit foams
disposed on the anatomical areas
to increase head comfort.
SPM 11 EN.indb 67
Custom Air System (Fig. A):
new adjustable system for a perfect fit.
OSFA (Fig. S) With this adjustment system the helmet is covering several sizes: one helmet for
sizes 51-55cm and one helmet for
sizes 55-58cm.
Beanie Convertible (Fig. D)
Women Customization
Pimp My Helmet
Warning: For use with Salomon
snowsports helmets only.
Headphones used in snowsports
may cause the skier/rider to not
hear other skiers/riders. This can
lead to an accident and possible
injury or death. Always stay in
control. Skiers/Riders downhill
from you always have priority, so
it's your priority to make sure you
avoid them. Headphones will also
restrict your ability to hear what
your edge/edges are doing on the
snow and may distract you. They
may distract you from focusing on
skiing or riding safely which may
lead to less control.
Care and handling:
The earpad sound system is built
to handle cold, snowy conditions.
However, this system is not waterproof. Do not submerge the
Earpad or cord in water or any
other liquid. Do not attempt to
clean or to disinfect your helmet
with the earpad sound system
installed.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Helmet & Pole
Helmet > 68
Helmet Technology > (continued)
Choosing the right size for your helmet
YOUR SIZE Head perimeter (cm)
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
Adult women
xXS (53-54)
Divine Origins Custom Air,
Divine Custom Air, Icon Origins Custom Air,
Poison Custom Air, Poison, Venom,
Venom Audio CA Elyse Saugstad
S (55-56)
M (57-58)
XS (54-55)
L (58-59)
Adult Men
Equipe*, Valdez*, X-Wing Custom Air,
Ranger Custom Air BT, Impact Custom Air,
Ranger Custom Air, Patrol Custom Air, Patrol,
Brigade Audio, Brigade Ghost Custom Air,
Brigade Pro Model, Patrol CA Mike Douglas,
Brigade Audio CA Cody Townsend
XS* (54-55)
M (57-58)
S (55-56)
L (58-59)
XL (60-61)
XXL (61-62)
* Size NOT available for Equipe, Valdez helmets
ADULT WOMEN OSFA SYSTEM:
xXS/S (53-56)
Icon Origins, Pearl Origins, Divine Origins
ADULT MEN OSFA SYSTEM:
XS/S (54-56)
Ranger, Cruiser
JUNIOR
*Equipe JR, Jib, Kiana, Patrol Junior
OSFA System
Zoom, Zoom Combo
M (57-59)
M (57-59)
L (60-62)
XXS (51-55)
JR (51-52) xXs (53-54)
S/M (55-58)
s (55-56)
M (57-58)
L/XXL (59-62)
Choosing your size (see table):
The helmet is a safety product.
To ensure optimal protection,
comfort and head hold, the helmet
must be chosen in the correct size.
To choose the correct size, it is
nec­es­sary to measure the cranial
perime­ter of the head in cm (from
the fore­head to the most prominent back part of the head).
Helmet adjustment:
The helmet must be properdine
positioned on, and adjusted to the
user’s head to ensure maximum
comfort and protection.
A properly positioned helmet must
not be too far forward or backwards on the user’s head ; the chin
strap must always be properly
adjusted and in the closed position.
In case of children’s helmets, an
adult should always check that the
helmet is properly secured.
* Size ONLY available for Equipe JR (White Red)
Head Measurer Use & Maintenance
H
J
Warning:
Salomon has developed a head
mea­sur­er that will help you to better serve your customer by being
able to recommend the helmet size
that corresponds to the circumference of his/her head.
The helmet is a safety product: it
must be chosen in the size that is
suitable to its user and be properly
positioned on his/her head (the
chin strap adjusted in the closed
position) to ensure optimum protection, comfort and hold.
This measurer can be used for all
Salomon Alpine and In Line Skate
helmets.
Recommendations for use:
- Loosen the roller (A) to be able
to place the measurer easily on
the head.
- Position the measurer on the
head according to (Fig. H),
touching the brow (B) and the
occipital bone (C).
Important: Make sure the headband (D) does not compress
the ears, which would affect the
measurement.
Please remember that the size
given by the measurer (centimeters) should be used only as an
indication to help you orient your
customer toward the proper size.
The final selection of the appropri­
ate size should be left to the customer.
Using the measurer should never
replace trying on the helmet.
SPM 11 EN.indb 68
K
- Hold the measurer in this position and turn the roller (A) (rotate
it clockwise).
- Turn the roller until it disengages
(Fig. J).
- Carefully remove the measurer
from the head, pulling the rear
upward, while maintaining pressure on the nose (Fig. K).
- Read the measurement on the
graduated scale (E) in the window (Fig. L).
- Choose the helmet according to
the size given by the measurer.
- Try the helmet on. Switch sizes if
there is a problem with the fit.
Salomon has provided for stickers
that can be put on the head measurer for a better understanding of
how to use the roller.
L
Maintenance recommendations:
To clean the measurer, you can use
a cloth with soap and water.
It is prohibited to use chemical products, hot water or pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol,
detergents, solvents or aerosols
that could permanently damage
the plastic materials and erase the
markings.
Warning:
Salomon does not cover any damage to the head measurer that is a
result of transportation, storage or
not abiding by the instructions for
use or maintenance.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Helmet & Pole
Pole > 69
Pole Technonolgy
Pole Technical Information
Choosing a pole size
Maintenance Recommendations
- Turn the pole upside down with the tip pointing up,
- Hold the pole right under the basket,
- Your arm will form a right angle (90°) when you have
the ideal size.
Mounting the replaceable baskets > Procedure
Salomon has made 3 types of replaceable baskets available to you:
1
A) Mounting: at the same time,
screw the basket on and push it
towards the handle of the pole.
Fig. A. Removing: at the same
time, unscrew the basket and
pull it toward the tip of the pole.
2
B) Screw the basket on completely
until you hear four clicks (wear
gloves as a precaution). Fig. S
Use a cloth with soap and water to clean the poles. It is prohibited to use
chemicals, hot water or pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents,
solvents or aerosols that can permanently damage the plastic materials
and erase the cosmetics.
Benefits of main technical features
- Spaceframe shaft: specific 3D
shapes (wing and AHT) for
advanced performance: higher
resistance and stiffness.
- Bi-material grip:
› hard part for precision,
› soft part for comfort.
- Racing grip: specifically designed for racers, a closer grip
to the pole for higher precision.
- Ultra light foam grip: the best
grip if you need lightness and
comfort with or without gloves.
- Gripfit: the grip with the best fit
and right shapes for less efforts.
- NPS (No Problem Strap): dual
side strap, easy to use and with
improved comfort.
- Interchangeable baskets: the big
one fits off-pists and powder, the
small one is more adapted for all
other uses.
- Carbide tip: bi-material tip for
higher resistance and durability.
Rental Poles
- Salomon designed specific poles for rental adapted to a professional
and intense use.
- This warranty will not apply for damages resulting of rental use of poles
that was not designed specifically for rental.
Pole Shaft Materials > Technical Features
Aluminium range
- Salomon know-how in aluminium is proven with bindings, ILS
and Mavic wheels.
- According to this experience, we
defined three levels of strength:
Aluminium Technology
by Salomon
Al HHHH
40% stronger
Al HHH
15% stronger
Al HH
Competitive strength/price ratio
SPM 11 EN.indb 69
Composite range
- We do our pole’s shafts the
same way that golf companies
do their own golf shafts.
- We defined three levels of
Carbon grade:
Carbon Technology
by Salomon
C HHHH
80% of Carbon
C HHH
40% of Carbon
C HH
15% of Carbon
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Contents > 70
SPARE PARTS – CONTENTS
Alpine Binding
SKIS
POLES
ALPINE BOOTS
NORDIC
SNOWBOARD BOARDS
SNOWBOARD BINDINGS
SNOWBOARD BOOTS
FOOTWEAR
71
76
76
76
79
81
81
83
84
This catalogue is for product display only. Salomon reserves the right to modify or discontinue any product. Every product not available in all countries. SALOMON reserves
the right to limit or to modify color and/or aesthetic versions of spare parts. These spare parts will nonetheless continue to be distributed in their original functions.
All rights reserved. Any reproductions, partial or in full, are prohibited.
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 70
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Bindings > 71
Alpine Binding
Track
1X2
78829401 $$ 20.00
78829601 $$ 20.00
Smartrak Prolink + 914
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI
04-05 S912 TI SC • S810TI SC • S712 SC • S710 TI SC • S710 SC • C609 SC • C608 SC •
1X2 C607 SC • C509 SC • 06 Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608
SC • 09 711 SC • L9 SC • L7 SC • L10 SC
04-05 S305 SC • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC
1X2
• 09 T5 SC
78378501
$$ 9.00
78378701
$$ 9.00
001178
$$10.00
10833301
$$7.00
12027001
$$6.00
Adjustable Toe Base Plate
1X2
S900 Eq SC 99 • SC 04+: All products •
IFT Free & fast 04+: All SC products
1X2
HI 09+: All products starting with 09/10 range
1X2 Z Speed all models: Lever adjustment
Quadrax Toe Track
S700 • S700 SR • S700 T • S700 TSR • S710 • S708 TSR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti
• S711 Pa
Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 SR • 608 • Smartrak Grip + Z12
• Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 • 609 TI • WARNING CHANGE THE SCREW FOR:
1X2 Z10 TI AXE + (788314) • 610 CP (000930) • 609 D+ (001101) • 607 (000896) • 607 SR (000896)
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC
• Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711
78379001
$$ 4.75
78829701
$$ 4.75
78829801
$$ 4.75
1X2 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • 08 LZ 7 • 09 T5 • T5 SR • L7 • L7 SR • L9 • L9 SR
54833901
$$ 4.75
1X2 08 LZ 8 • LZ 9
10061901
$$ 4.75
78385801
$$ 4.00
1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS
78576301
$$ 6.00
1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS
1X2
Position Indicator
1X2 ITF Free & Fast SC 04+: All products
Central Plate
78829901
$$ 5.00
Smartrak Prolink/Control + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 711
78833601
$$ 9.00
Smartrak Prolink/Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI
78833801 $$ 13.00
78833901 $$ 9.00
Smartrak Grip + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 611 • 610 • 609
78834001 $$ 13.00
$$ 9.00
1X2 Smartrak Grip + 609 TI • 710 TI • Z10 TI
Smartrak Rental
10056601
Lightrak senior HL
10832901
$$ 9.00
Lightrak senior JL
10833001
$$ 9.00
Heel Guide Or Heel Track Housing
1X2 C&S: All products 99- Except: Junior
1X2 04-05 S710 SR • C609 SR • C509 SR • 06 609 SR
001173
$$ 5.00
268-348 mm: 78379501
$$ 6.00
1X2 04-05 C305 SR • 06 305 • 06 TZ5SR
190-246 mm: 78379201
$$ 2.00
1X2 SC Senior: All products
260-382 mm: 12030101
$$13.00
1X2 04-05 C305 CS • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC
216-304 mm: 78379301
$$ 2.00
1X2 Z Speed: Brake plate
12027101
$$3.50
1X2 Flat Ti: All products
78389701 $$ 13.00
1X2 Smartrak Ti: All products
24729201 $$ 28.00
Track
Lever
1X2
All C&S products • Kaikki C&S • Tuotteet • 99+ Except: Junior • Cosmic • Racing • 900 •
850 • 700 • 725 • 600 • 509 • 400
Parts Count
04: year
How to read the tables
230-308 mm: dimensions
(T175): size
##### while quantites last
78393901
$$ 8.00
Reference
##### New
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 71
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Bindings > 72
V.I. Window
1X2 C305 • S305 • S 305 SC • C 305 SR
(0,75-4,5) 78146601
$$ 5.00
78830001
$$ 7.50
Anti Friction Plate
1X2 914 FIS 20 • 914
78830101
$$ 7.50
611 • 610 • 610 SC • 610 CP • 609 • 609 Ti/D+ • 609 SC • 608 • 608 SC
78830201
$$ 6.00
607 • 607 SR
78830301
$$ 6.00
78830401
$$ 6.75
1X2 Z12 TI • Z12 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 • 710 TI • 710 SC • 710 • 710 ITF
1X2
1X2 914 LAB
All S914 models (except S914 T Fis 17) • S912 • S910 • S875 • S850 • S812 • 811 • S810
• S900 Eq Poweraxe • S900 Eq AL Poweraxe S900 Eq Axe plus 99 • S900 TI • S900 Eq FIS
1X2
• S900 Carbon 99 • S900 Eq AL 99 • S900 Eq SC 99 • S711 Ps • S711 • S711 Pi Sp • S710
Pi Sp SR
887608 $$ 13.00
1X2 00-05 All C products • Except: C607 • C607 SR
888134 $$ 12.00
Quadrax 600 (except Q600 Equalizer) • Q675 • Q700 Synchro C • Q400 • Q300 • Q300 SR •
Q300 Synchro C • Q300 mini • Q500 • Q600 • Q600 Drive Plus 99 • Q600 Poweraxe • Q500 SR
1X2
• Q500 Drive Plus 99 • Q400 SR • Q500 Synchro C (Drive +) • Q725 Drive + • Q725 Poweraxe •
Q575 • C509 sr • C509 • C407 SR • C407 • C305 Grom SR • C305 Grom • Mini Grom • C610
000934
$$ 8.00
001134
$$ 7.00
1X2 Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 S
54834001
$$ 8.00
1X2 Junior Performance AFD (Junior boots norms only) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 SC
Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 08 Junior TZ 5 • LZ 7 • LZ 8 • LZ 9 1X2
09 Junior T 5 • L 7 • L 8 • L 9
89267001
1X2 S300 • S300 SC • S305 • S305 SC 05-
10056701
$$ 4.00
1X2 07 STH 12 • 08 STH 14
54834101
$$ 8.00
1X2 07 STH 16
54834201 $$ 10.00
1X2 08 STH 14 Driver
10447501
$$ 6.00
1X2 Z Speed all models
12027301
$$7.00
Toe Housing
Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • Z10 TI AXE + • 710 • 610 CP • 610 • 609 D+ • 609 • 609
SR • 608 • 607 • 607 SR • Smartrak Grip + Z12 • Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 •
1X2 609 TI • Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710
SC: Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711 • STH 12
78856001 $$ 10.00
78856101
$$ 8.00
10833201 $$ 10.00
Z 14 • STH 14 • Z 12 oversize • STH 12 oversize
Brake
887610 $$ 12.00
1X2 Junior SC: Q300 SC • S300 SC • S305 SC • 305 SC 06
1X2
Junior SR: Q300 • Q300 SR • S300 • S305 • C305 SR • 305 SR 03-07 • 305 06
Junior mini: Q300 Mini • MiniGrom • 305 mini 06
887611 $$ 10.00
887609 $$ 10.00
54834301 $$ 12.00
10055301 $$ 10.00
1X2 Junior: TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR 07
1X2 Junior: TZ 5 SC • TZ 5 Juniortrak 07
R75 DG X 100:  78575401   $$ 15.00
R80 DG X 100:  78575501   $$ 15.00
R90 DG X 100:  78575701   R100 DG X 100:  78575801  $$ 25.00
S920 LAB • S916 LAB • S914 LAB •
920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB •
1X2 914 ZZ LAB • STH 16 • STH 14 Driver
• STH 14 • STH 12 Oversize • STH 12 •
Z14 LAB • Z12 LAB • Z Speed (all models)
R115 DG X 100:  78575901   $$ 25.00
R130 DG X 100:  78855701 $$ 25.00
B75 DG X 100:  78574501   $$ 15.00
B80 DG X 100:  78574801   $$ 15.00
B85 DG X 100:  78574901  $$ 15.00
B90 DG X 100:  78575001   $$ 25.00
1X2 Other range models
B100 DG X 100:  78575101 $$ 25.00
B115 DG X 100:  78575201   $$ 25.00
B130 DG X 100:  78830601 $$ 25.00
C609 SC on Snowblade
DG = Double Grip
L
l
B85 G X 100:  78855801 $$ 15.00
G = Grip
B85 G x 100
R100 DG x 100
l L
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 72
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Bindings > 73
Jigs
All Senior products
Q300 • Q300mini • S300 • S305 • C305 • Mini Grom
1X1 TZ 5 Juniortrak
Synchro Center+Rental: Junior/Senior
Z Speed: All models
56-99 mm: 001156     $$100.00
80-123 mm: 001157 $$100.00
56-99 mm: 78406101 $$80.00
56-99 mm: 24729001 $$100.00
56-99 mm: 001003     $$100.00
80-123 mm: 001040 $$100.00
70-116 mm: 11139301 $$50.00
Tools
1X1 Deflex/Hangl & Poweraxe Race GS: Drill bit
1X5 Drill bit
1X1 Pilot: Torx bit for electric screwdriver
1X1 Posidrive screwdriver
1X1 Adjustement tool
1X2 Pilot & Poweraxe Race GS / Hangl 00: Torx bit
1X100 Repair plugs
1X1 Special binding mounting glue
Ø 4,6 X L 11,5 mm: 001121
$$40.00
Ø 3,6 X L 8 mm : 000814  
$$78.00
Ø 4,1 X L 8 mm: 000813  
$$78.00
Ø 4,1 X L 9,5 mm: 000893  
$$78.00
Ø 3,6 X L 9,5 mm: 000892
$$78.00
Fein 25 mm: 887607
$$16.00
7 mm: 000862
$$14.00
000902
$$20.00
25 mm: 887606
$$16.00
000846
$$16.00
000811
$$10.00
Ø 4,5 mm: (white) 000819  
(black) 000818
$$3.50
1X1 Tube of grease
000905
$$5.00
1X2 Transparent demoboard + straps
001188
$$20.00
15 mm: 78491501
$$20.00
78497501
$$34.00
1X100 Plastic plugs
Plate Kit
1X2 Cosmic & Z Axe plus
1X2 Snowblade release
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 73
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Bindings > 74
Screws (Together column number and reference # = screw positions)
ø
Référence
Reference
L
ø
L
Voir tableaux pages suivantes pour les modèles correspondants
See charts on following pages for the concerned models
}
e.g.:
17/ 000900
14
15
mm: Ø x L mm: Ø x L
Longueur • Length
000834
000836
000899
000900
000908
000957
001004
001018
001085
001087
001099
000829
000830
000832
000894
000895
000896
000897
000909
000910
000911
000912
000930
000958
000960
000961
001057
001058
001082
001083
001086
001100
001101
001102
001136
001138
78385901
78831301
78831401
78832201
78832801
88813801
88813901
10115201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
10 x 13,5
10 x 20,5
10 x 16,5
10 x 23,2
10 x 25,0
10 x 27,5
10 x 18,3
10 x 21,3
10 x 36,0
10 x 29,0
10 x 32,5
10 x 13,5
10 x 15,0
10 x 23,0
10 x 11,8
8 x 13,0
9 x 15,0
10 x 18,8
9 x 10,0
10 x 16,5
9 x 18,0
9 x 29,0
9 x 16,5
9 x 12,5
9 x 27,0
9 x 8,5
9 x 19,5
9 x 32,5
9 x 21,0
9 x 25,5
10 x 19,5
9 x 24,0
9 x 23,0
10 x 34,0
9 x 10,7
9 x 34,0
8,8 x 14,35
9 x 17,3
9 x 26
BN8 4 x 10
8,8 x 12,7
10 x 12
10 x 20,5
8,8 x 12,6
001153
001101
000912
001102
001057
001083
78831501
78831701
78832001
(All prices in U.S. dollars. 78832501
Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 74
79491501
787169 - 787170
SMARTRAK CONTROL +
Z12TI . Z10
78497501
$$ 13.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 8.00
$$ 14.00
$$ 15.00
$$ 14.00
$$ 15.00
$$ 15.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 12.00
$$ 8.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 14.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 15.00
$$ 14.00
$$ 12.00
$$ 15.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 15.00
—
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 12.00
$$ 12.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 12.00
$$ 8.00
$$ 9.00
$$ 9.00
$$ 8.00
$$ 8.00
$$ 10.00
$$ 13.00
$$ 10.00
SMARTRAK JUNIOR
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Bindings > 75
Toe (prices and screw positions on page 74)col./ref.
C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 mini 06 • Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07 • L 7 • L 7 SR 08
 2/ 000894
S305 Grom
 2/ 000958
S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S914 Fis • S912 Ti • S912 Fi • S912 • S910 Team • S810 • S810Ti • S914 Pi FR • S914 Fis 24 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 24 •
 2/ 001057
S910 Fis 20 • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S812 Pi Edge • S910 Ti
C610 • C509 • C509 SR • C608 SR • C608 • C608 Fis 20 • C608 Fis 17 • C710 • C609 Ti • C609 SR • C609 •
 3/ 000930
S710 • S708 T • S708 T SR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti • S710 Pi FR
 2/ 000911
 4/ 001082
S711 • S711 Pi FR
 3/ 000912
Plaque Axe + 99+ S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S910 T • S810 Ti • S810 CP • S912 Ti • S810 SR
 1/ 000960
S710 Axe+ • S708T • S710 CP • S710 Ti CP • S711 CP
 4/ 001083
C610 Axe+ • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • C710 Ti CP
 4/ 001101
Plaque Drive+ 500 • 600 • C509 Drive+ • C609 Drive+
S305 SC
 8/ 000961    6/ 000958
Junior T 5 SC 07
 8/ 000961    9/ 000958    3/ 000894
S912 Ti SC • 810 SC • S 810 Ti SC
 3/ 000911    5/ 000909
S710 SC • S711 SC • S712 SC • S710 Ti SC
 6/ 000930    5/ 000909    6/ 001057
C509 SC • C608 SC • C609 SC
 6/ 000930    6/ 000911    5/ 000909
LZ 8 SC 08 • L 7 &• L 9 SC 09
 5/ 000909    12/ 000958    9/ 000829
920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS
 16/ 001101    16/ 001082
 4/ 001082
Pilot S710 Cosmic
S920 • S916 • S914 Fis 17 • S920 Race • STH 16 07 
 4/ 000910    4/ 000911
LZ 8 • LZ 9 08 • L 9 & L 10 09
 7/ 000829
 4/ 78385901
C607 SR • C607
 3/ 001101
S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3
 5/ 000909    6/ 000930    6/ 001057
Z12 Ti SC • Z12 SC • Z10 Ti SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06
Z12 Ti • Z10 Ti • Z10 Fis 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 Ti • 609 SR 608 06 •
 6/ 000930    6/ 78831301
Smartrak Grip+ 610, 611, 710 Ti, Z10 Ti, Z10, Z12, 609, 609 Ti 06 • Z14 08
Z12 Ti AXE+ • 610 CP 06
 2/ 000960    2/ 78831401
 1/ 001100    1/ 001101
609 D+ 06
914 Fis 20 • 914 • Smartrak Grip + 914 06
 1/ 000930    1/ 78831301
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08
 1/ 78832201
Smartrak Prolink + 914 06
 1/ 78832801
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08
 2/ 10115201
STH 12 07 • STH 14 • Z14 LAB 08
6/ 000930    6/ 000911
STH 14 Driver 08
 3/ 000911
Brake (prices and screw positions on page 74)col./ref.
Brake
 5/ 000829
Heel (prices and screw positions on page 74)col./ref.
Pilot Edge Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Ti Pi Edge
 17/ 000830    17/ 000829    17/ 000900
Pilot Free Ride Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S711 Pi FR
 17/ 001086    5/ 000957
C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 Mini 06
 2/ 000834    2/ 000899
S305 Grom
 8/ 001004    11/ 001018
S914 Fis 17 • 914 • Z12 TI • Z10 TI • Z10 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 608 06 • C608 Fis 17 • S710 • S608 • C610 • C509 • C608 • C710 • S710 Ti •
 11/ 000894    11/ 001004
C609 Ti • C609 • Z14 & Z12 08 • LZ 8 08 • LZ 9 08 • Z12++ 09 • L 9 & L 10 09
609 SR 06 • S710 SR • S711 SR • S708 T SR • C509 SR • C608 SR • C609 SR
 1/ 000894    1/ 000836
S912 Ti • S912 • S810 • S711 • S910 T • S810 TI • S914 Fis 24 • S910 Fis 24
 3/ 000897    6/ 000957
C608 Fis 20 • 914 Fis • S914 Pi FR • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • 914 FIS 20 • Z10 FIS 20 06 •
 11/ 000830    11/ 000900
S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S812 Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 20
Plaque Axe + 99+ S850 • S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S710 • S711 CP • S912 Ti • Z10 TI AXE+ • 610 CP 06 •
 11/ 001101    11/ 001102
S608 T • C610 • S910 T • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • S710 CP • S810 CP • C710 Ti CP
 11/ 000911    11/ 000908
Plaque Drive + • C509 Drive + • 609 D + 06
S305 SC • 305 SC 06
 6/ 000957    11/ 001099
 9/ 001083    9/ 001102
S850 SC (Drive+) • C608 SC • C609 SC • S912 Ti SC • S810 SC • S810 S • S712 S • S711 SC • S710 S • C509 SC • S810 Ti SC • All SC 02+
920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS
 16/ 001100    16/ 001138    16/ 000897
S920 • S916 • STH 12 & 16 07 • STH Driver 14 08 • STH 14 08 • Z14 LAB 08 • STH12++ 09
 4/ 000897    4/ 000829    4/ 000912
C607 SC
 17/ 001100    17/ 001102
C607 SR • 607 SR 06 • L7 SR 08
 17/ 000909    17/ 001004
C607 • 607 06 • L7 08
S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3
 2/ 000899    2/ 000909
 7/ 888139    7/ 001087
Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06 • LZ8 SC 08 • L 9 & L 10 09
 1/ 001085    2/ 001083
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914 • Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 TI • Z10 • 711 • 710 TI 06 • Z14 08
Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07
Junior T 5 Juniortrak 07
Junior T 5 SC 07
SPM 11 EN.indb 75
 1/ 78832201
 11/ 000896    2/ 000899
 11/ 000908    11/ 001101
 11/ 001099    11/ 000912
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
ALPINE Skis > 76
SKIS
Tips
1X2 Verse 8500 00-03 • Verse 590 03 • X-Scream 700 01-02 • Crossmax 700 01-04 • Scleaver 790 03 • Scrambler 400 04
1X2
1X2
1X2
1X2
1X2
1X2
1X2
Crossmax 10 Pilot Rental 01-02 • Crossmax 8 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax 7 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Scleaver 7.9
Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 10 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax7 TX Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 8 Pilot Rental 02 • Scream 10
Pilot Rental 01-02
Equipe SC • Equipe GC • Equipe 9GC • Demo 10 3V • Demo 10 2V • Demo9 • Demo8 • •Demo Lady • Crossmax V12
• Crossmax V10 • Rush n°10 • Rush n°7 • Rush 700 • •Streetracer 10 • Streetrace r8 • Streetracer 7 • Streetracer 6,
600, 800 05-06 • •Rush 6, 600, 800 05-06 • Equipe 10 T 3V 05-06 • Demo Lady 06
Scrambler Hot • Scrambler 9 • Scrambler 8 • Scrambler 7 • Scrambler 6 • Scrambler 5 • Scrambler Custom •
Scrambler 700 • Scrambler 400 • Siam n°10 • Siam n°7 • XW 5, 6, 8 • 400, 700 06 • XW Fury • Hurricane 06 •
Siam n°5, 400 05-06 • Axess 06
Crossmax 10 Pilot 03-04 • Crossmax 9 Pilot 04 • Crossmax 8 Pilot 04 • Teneighty 02-04 • Scream 10 Hot 03-04 •
Scream 10 Xtra Hot 03-04
Equipe GC • GC Race • GC Series • SC, SC Race, 3V • Streetracer 8, 10, 800, 80,8 TX, Sport • Demo X 2V, X 3V, XR, XT •
Crossmax V8, V10, V12, V800 • 9000 replica 06 Equipe 3V, GC Series, GC Race, SC Race • Aero GT, X • Demo X3, XR, XT,
GTX • Crossmax V8, V10, V800, W12 • XW Cyclone, Typhoon 07 Equipe GC, GC Series, SC Race, RC • Aero GT R, GT, XSI
• Aeromax Ti, STi • Demo XR, XT • Crossmax V10 • Origins Amethyst, Amethyst 800 08
XW 3, 4,4 Tx, 10 • Siam N3, N4, N8, N10, N 40, Flirt, Origins, Sinsation • XW Blast, Tornado, Sandstorm, Vector, AT,
X Radiant 06 XW 4, 6, 800, X3, X7, Attack, Tx, STX, Vector, Tornado, Fury, Sandstorm, Storm • Jewel Amber, Crystal,
Diadem, Opal, Origins, Pearl, Topaz - Demo lady 07 XW 4, 6, 8, 10, 500, 800, X7, X9, Fire, Cyclone, Hurricane •
Origins Amber, Amber 500, Pearl, Ruby, Diadem, Crystal, Jade, Opal,Topaz • Demo lady 08
Equipe 2V Race 07 • Demo X2, Ti, RT 07 • X Wing 500 07-08 • Aero Ti, S, RT, GTI, Ti Rental, S Rental 07 •
Jewel Amber 500 07 • Instinct Fever 500 07 • Aeromax RT, SR, GTS 08
89249301 $$ 10.00
78570801
$$ 8.00
78571001 $$ 10.00
78325101 $$ 10.00
78799401
$$ 6.00
78799501
$$ 6.00
24729101
$$ 8.00
10077101 $$ 15.00
1X2 XW Fury 08 • XW Tornado, Tornado Ti 08-09 • Origin Diamond 09-10 • Enduro 10
1X2
89249201 $$ 10.00
XW Storm 09 • XW 8, 6, 4 09 • 8R, 6R 09 • Origin Opal, Topaz, Crystal, Amber, Diadem, Crystal R 5 09 •
XW Typhoon, Hurricane, Twister 09
10832701 $$ 10.00
1X2 Czar, Lord, Dumont, Suspect, Threat, Lady, Mai Tai 08-10 • Shogun, Vamp, Geisha 09-10 • Knight 10
10879901 $$ 12.00
1X2 XW Focus 10
12145601
$$10.00
1X2 Select, Vital, Zen, Fresh Touch 10 • Powerline Daytona, 24 Speed, 24 Sport, 24 Sport R, GT Pro, GT Pro R 10
12145701
$$10.00
S90190
$$ 6.00
S90158
$$ 8.00
10853701
$$ 6.00
10853901
$$ 6.00
10854001
$$ 6.00
10854201
$$ 6.00
1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3 (collier/cuff)
Collier / Cuff: 10809301
$$ 5.00
1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3
Coque / Shell: 10817901
$$ 5.00
Collier / Cuff: 12006901
$$3.00
99493501
$$ 5.00
Collier / Cuff: 12007001
$$2.00
Edges (25cm)
1X2 For all models
Base Material (50cm)
1X1 For all models
POLES
Baskets
Carbon Poles: Rental Composite 06-10 • Element 08-10 • Element Vario 10 • Origins 08
Aluminium poles: Origins 09-10
08-10: Rental Anodized Adult, Artic, Artic Origins, Northpole, Divine Origins
1X2 09-10: Racer, Northpole Origins, F-One, Allium, X-Wing, Fury, Patrol, Brigade
10: X-W, Mai Tai, Topaz
09-10: Rental Anodized JR, Equipe Junior, X-Wing Junior
1X2
10: Kitten
1X2 Strap Rental Adult
1X2
ALPINE BOOTS
Buckle Tooth Insert
1X2
1/4 turn buckle: Performa & Irony • Xwave & Rush • Impact 880 & Idol 880 • Mission
& Divine• Mission RS & Divine RS
1X2 Performa & Irony • Elios & Charm • Mission & Divine
1X2 Focus • Quest • SPK • Ghost • Shogun • Poison
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 76
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Buckle
Poles > 77
(M* = Micro • V* = Vario)
M*
Alu: Ghost • Shogun • Poison • Pro Model • Kaos • Kreation • Kaïd • Keira • SPK
1X2
M* Alu: Course X3 • Falcon • Instinct • Impact • Idol • X Wave • Rush • Mission RS •
1X2 Divine RS • Mission • Divine
M*
Alu: Quest
1X2
M*
Plastic: Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS • Charm • Performa
1X2
V*
Symbio: 500 • 440
1X1
V*
Symbio
1X2 Plastic: T3 • T2 • X3 60 • Team
1X2 Quest Backbone
S: 10818001 L: 10818101 $$ 20.00
S: 10818201 M: 10818301 L: 10818401 $$ 15.00
S: 12007101 M: 12007201
L: 12007301
$$7.50
$$8.00
S: 12007401 M: 12007501 L: 12007601
$$3.00
S: 78396901   L: 78397001
$$ 7.00
Cable length: 540 mm / 22.0-25.5: 882844 $$ 12.00
Cable length: 560 mm / 26.0-30.0: 882845 $$ 12.00
Cable length: 580 mm / 78862701 $$ 13.00
$$3.00
S: 12007701  
L: 12007801
$$3.00
12009601
$$4.50
23.5: 12001622   24.5: 12001624   25.5: 12001626  
26.5: 12001629   27.5: 12001631   28.5: 12001633
$$85.00
22.5W: 12001756   23.5W: 12001722   24.5W: 12001724   25.5W: 12001726
$$50.00
26.5: 12001729  27.5: 12001731  28.5: 12001733  
29.5: 12001736  30.5: 12001738  31.5: 12001741
$$50.00
24.5W: 12001824   25.5W: 12001826   26.5W: 12001829
$$50.00
27.5: 12001831   28.5: 12001833   29.5: 12001836
$$50.00
Innerboot
1X2
My Custom Fit Race:
Falcon • Instinct • X3 JR
1X2 Rental AutoCustom Shell: Focus • SPK
1X2 Rental Thermic Fit Biovent: Quest
1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Performa (M&W)
22.0W: 78400219   23.5W: 78400222   $$72.00
24.5W: 78400224   25.5W: 78400226  
26.5: 78399929   27.5: 78399931   28.5: 78399933   $$ 72.00
29.5: 78399936  30.5: 78399938  
31.5: 78583741   32.5: 78583743   33.5: 78583745 $$ 78.00
1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Symbio
1X2
Thermic Fit:
Performa T 3 • T 3 Rental • Kaïd • Keira
1X2
Thermic Fit:
Performa T 2 • T 2 Rental • Kaïd
1X2
22.0: 489681   23.5: 489683   24.5: 489685  
25.5: 489687  26.5: 489689   27.5: 489691   $$ 50.00
28.5: 489693  29.5: 490429 30.5: 489695
22.0: 12001919   23.5: 12001922   24.5: 12001924  
25.5: 12001926   26.5: 12001929  
$$30.00
18.0: 12002010   19.0: 12002012  
20.0: 12002054   21.0: 12002055  
$$25.00
Thermic Fit:
Impact JR
22.0: 78399719   23.5: 78399722   24.5: 78399724  
25.5: 78399726   26.5: 78399729   27.5: 78399731
$$62.00
1X2
My Custom Fit Pro:
Falcon 100 • X3 JR 09
22.0: 78862919   23.5: 78862922   24.5: 78862924  
25.5: 78862926   26.5: 78862929   27.5: 78862931
$$86.00
1X2
My Custom Fit Performance:
Impact Idol 
1X2
Rental Thermic Fit:
Impact Idol  
1X2
XFit Fusion Advanced:
Mission Divine  
1X2
XFit Fusion Advanced:
Mission Divine  
1X2
Rental Thermic Fit:
Mission RS & Divine RS
  22.0 W: 55472419   23.5 W: 55472422   24.5 W: 55472424   25.5 W: 55472426  
$$90.00
26.5: 55472429   27.5: 55472431   28.5: 55472433  
29.5: 55472436   30.5: 55472438   31.5: 55472441
$$90.00
  22.0 W: 55472519   23.5 W: 55472522   24.5 W: 55472524   25.5 W: 55472526  
$$70.00
26.5: 55472529   27.5: 55472531   28.5: 55472533  
29.5: 55472536   30.5: 55472538   31.5: 55472541
$$70.00
  22.0 W: 55472619   23.5 W: 55472622   24.5 W: 55472624   25.5 W: 55472626  
$$88.00
26.5: 55472629   27.5: 55472631   28.5: 55472633  
29.5: 55472636   30.5: 55472638   31.5: 55472641
$$88.00
22.0 W: 11105519 23.5 W: 11105522 24.5 W: 11105524 25.5 W: 11105526
26.5: 11105529 27.5: 11105531 28.5: 11105533
29.5: 11105536 30.5: 11105538 31.5: 11105541
22.0 W: 10078319 23.5 W: 10078322 24.5 W: 10078324 25.5 W: 10078326
$$60.00
26.5: 10078429 27.5: 10078431 28.5: 10078433 29.5: 10078436
30.5: 10078438 31.5: 10078441 32.5: 10078443 33.5: 10078445
$$88.00
$$80.00
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 77
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Boots > 78
Bootfitting
1X1 Heating machine
1X1 Measurer
U.S. & Canada: Z15620   $$ 295.00
10877101
$$80.00
Bootfitting
18.0: 10078610   19.0: 10078612   20.0: 10078654   21.0: 10078655  
22.0: 10078619  23.0-23.5: 10078621  24.0-24.5: 10078623  25.0-25.5: 10078625   $$ 5.50
26.0-26.5: 10078628  27.0-27.5: 10078630   28.0-28.5: 10078632  29.0-29.5: 10078635  
30.0-30.5: 10078637   31.0-31.5: 10078639  32.0-32.5: 10078642  33.0-33.5: 10078644  
22.0: 55473119   23.0-23.5: 55473121   24.0-24.5: 55473123   25.0-25.5: 55473125   $$ 15.00
Therm-ic Insoles
26.0-26.5: 55473128   27.0-27.5: 55473130  
24.0-24.5: 88164023   25.0-25.5: 88164025   26.0-26.5: 88164028   $$ 12.00
Footbed: Standard (black)
27.0-27.5: 88164030   28.0-28.5: 88164032   29.0-29.5: 88164035  
22.0-23.5: 489965   24.0-25.5: 489966   $$ 12.00
Footbed: Performa Prolink+Sport • Evolution
26.0-27.5: 489967   28.0-29.5: 489968    
2 • Verse • Ellipse • Performa
30.0-33.5: 78592037 $$ 6.00
Sealing gaskets
$$2.50
22.0-27.5: 12002101   28.0-31.5: 12002201
Mission, Divine
22.0-25.5: 55472301   $$ 8.00
Sealing gaskets
Impact Idol
26.0-31.5: 55473001 $$ 8.00
22.0-25.5: 10078701   $$ 12.00
Lower leg strap 35 mm (black/red)
26.0-33.5: 10078801
1X2 Rental Insoles
1X2
1X2
1X2
1X4
1X4
1X2
78591901
$$ 5.00
1X4 Course Ellipse: Canting rivet
78399001
$$ 8.00
1X4 Course X2: Canting screw
78399101 $$ 14.00
1X4 X-Wave • Impact • Mission RS • Divine RS • Falcon • Instinct: Canting rivets
78399201
1X20 Toothed nut M4 & screw
10078901 $$ 10.00
1X10 Screw + insert (teeth + 3D plate)
12002301
1X2 Pre-cut foam sheet (4mm)
10079101 $$ 35.00
1X8 Lateral cap Y/C (grey)
Innerboot Adaptation / Bootfitting
$$ 8.00
$$2.50
22.0-25.5: 882397  
26.0-30.0: 882398
24.0-25.5: 882399  
26.0-30.0: 882400
$$ 7.00
$$ 7.00
$$ 7.00
$$ 7.00
1X2 Back: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio 440 05 • Elios • Charm
8 mm / 22.0-33.5: 487450
$$ 6.00
Front: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio • Performa 04 •
1X2
Verse 04 • Ellipse 04
8 mm / 22.0-25.5: 489617  
8 mm / 26.0-33.5: 489618
$$ 8.00
$$ 8.00
1X2
Prolink Forward Lean Adjustment Wedge :
(All products Course • Performa Prolink) (black)
1X2 Prolink innerboot adaptation plate
Bootsole + Screws
1X2
Walkadin Back: Verse • Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony •
Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine
Walkadin Front: Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony • Symbio 440 05 •
1X2 Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS •
SPK • Elios • Charm
Alpine Pad Front: Quest (grey/black)
Alpine Pad Back:
Quest • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS (black/grey)
Back: W-Wave (M&W) • Course XR Japon • Course GT • Course T • 1080 • 1080 Japon
1X2
• Course 100 • 90 • 80 • 70
1X2
12 mm / 22.0-33.5: 55473201
$$8.00
12 mm / 22.0-25.5: 53527601  
$$ 8.00
12 mm / 26.0-33.5: 53527701
$$ 8.00
12002401
$$4.00
 10079001 $$ 15.00
 881642
$$ 5.00
1X2 Evolution2
 490353
$$ 6.00
1X2 Back: Team 3.0 • team 3.5
 489763
$$ 5.00
 16.0-17.0: 488030
$$ 4.00
1X2 Front: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21)
 882381
$$ 6.00
1X2 Back: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21)
882382
$$ 6.00
1X2 Back: 12 Mini • 15 Mini
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 78
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Alpine Boots > 79
NORDIC
Laces
1X1
Quickfit
(see page 84: ref 86065701 Footwear)
1X10 Quickfit Holder
95 cm: 86065701
$$ 6.00
 10108001
$$ 4.00
(black): 10108101   $$ 10.00
(grey): 10108201 $$ 10.00
1X2 Zip
1X2 Lace
10107201
$$ 7.00
1X2 Strap Velcro
25823701
$$ 6.00
1X5 Carbon Pro • Racing Skate 9 • Active 9 Skate • Vitane 9 Skate
10106801
$$ 4.00
1X5 861 • Active 8 Skate CL • Vitane 8 Skate CL • Equipe Combi
10109201
$$ 4.00
1X5 Nail Active 08 Black
12011801
$$2.00
9K: 25823652   10K: 25823608   11K: 25823610   12K: 25823612   13K: 25823654  
1: 25823616   2: 25823617   3: 25823656   4: 25823621   5: 25823623  
6: 25823625   7: 25823627   8: 25823629   9: 25823631   10: 25823633  
11: 25823635   12: 25823637   13: 25823639   14: 25823641
$$ 8.00
Rivet
Insoles
1X2 Durafresh 5 mm
$$ 8.00
Screw Chart
1X100 Profil Equipe Junior
1X100
Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Profil Active SC
SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2
1X100 SNS X Adventure Raid
  Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 78859901 $$ 19.00
  Ø 6,3 / 17,7: 890111 $$ 14.00
  Ø 6,3 / 26: F872020 $$ 14.00
SNS X Adventure Raid
Pilot Equipe Skate • SNS X Adv Access • Profil Auto Men/ Women
Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/ Women
1X100 Plaque SPS Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/Women
  Ø 6,3 / 19,5: 890109 $$ 13.00
Pilot Equipe Classic
Profil Equipe Skate - Profil Equipe Classic - Profil Active SC
SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2
Profil Auto JR
Pilot Equipe Classic
1X100 Profil Snow/Monster
  Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 890112 $$ 13.00
Pilot Sport Junior - Pilot Junior
Profil Equipe JR
Plaque SPS Pilot Junior
1X50 Profil Auto Junior (Skis < 140)
1X10 Vis Réglage / Adjustment screw • Equipe Classic Pilot
 Ø 6,3 / 12: 108797
$$10.00
  Ø 5,4 / 10: 000909 $$ 13.00
55454101
$$ 3.00
Pull Tab
1X10 Pilot Equipe Skate - Pilot Active Skate
(yellow): 10106201 $$ 12.00
Plugs
Pilot Equipe Skate • Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Pilot Active Skate • Profil Auto (Men/
women/Junior) • Profil Active SC • SNS X adventure Raid+Access
  890094
$$ 4.00
1X10 Profil Equipe Classic • Profil Equipe skate • Profil Active SC
  10102101
$$ 6.00
1X1 Screw cap Pilot équipe Classic
  55454201
$$ 3.00
1X1 Screw cap Pilot sport
  55454301
$$ 3.00
1X10
Cap
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 79
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
SKI NORDIQUE > 80
Flexor
Profil Equipe Skate
1X2 Profil Equipe Classic
115: (red)  10104201  
125: (red)  10104301
$$ 5.00
$$ 5.00
85: (yellow)  10102201
$$ 5.00
Profil Active SC
105: (grey)  10105101
$$ 5.00
Profil Auto Men
105: (black)  10104801
$$ 5.00
1X2 Profil Auto Women
Profil Auto Junior
1X2 SNS X Adventure Raid
95: (grey)  10104901
$$ 5.00
Junior: (yellow)  10105001
$$ 5.00
185: (grey)  10104401
$$ 5.00
Ridge Plate
1X2 Profil Equipe
  78846901 $$ 10.00
  78847201 $$ 10.00
1X2 Ridge plate Profil Auto Universal
  78847101 $$ 10.00
1X2 Ridge Plate Pilot Skate
1X1 S/E Plate Pilot Equipe Classic
55454001 $$ 18.00
1X1 SPS Plate
25823501
$$ 5.00
  78847301
$$ 8.00
Steel Link
1X2 Steel link: Pilot
Service Products
1X1 Jig • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure
1X4 Reversible jig pads • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure
1X5 Drill bit - Profil Automatique Junior
1X1 Drill bit
1X1 Special repair plug drill bit
1X100 Repair plugs
1X1 6 face posidrive bit
Sticker Pilot Equipe
891000 $$ 65.00
  10106401 $$ 15.00
Ø 3,6 x L 8 mm:  000814 $$ 78.00
Ø 3,6 x L 15 mm: 10105201 $$ 30.00
10105301 $$ 32.00
000846 $$ 16.00
78504801 $$ 16.00
55453901
$$ 5.00
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 80
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Nordic > 81
SNOWBOARD BOARDS
Snowboard Tip Protector
1X1 Rental boards (black)
55473801
$$ 8.00
S: 55473954   M/L: 55473955
$$ 8.00
SNOWBOARD BINDINGS
No spare parts for S PRO TEAM bindings
Transmission Pads
1X2
L+R Base Pad all SP models (khaki/black)
1X2
L+R Base Pad all SPX models (black)
S: 78858454   M: 78858456   L: 78858458 $$ 30.00
1X2
L+R Base Pad all Force & Grace models (black)
1X2
L+R Base Front Pad Slasher: all Slasher models, Arcade, Stella, Celeste, Patriot
1X2
L+R Base Pad all Relay models (black)
Black: S: 53527254   M: 53527256   L: 53527258 $$ 18.00
1X2 Cover disc Pad + Screw for transfer base:
L+R Transfer models
Black: S: 10832554   M: 10832556   L: 10832558  
White: S: 10834254   M: 10834256   L: 10834258  
$$4,00
$$4,00
1X8 Screw + washers for disk - All Models (except 98 Rental)
88999301
$$ 5.00
1X2 6 holes Disk IMS + Screws + Washers - All Models (except 98 Rental & Speedfit)
78855401
$$ 8.00
S: (black) 12023654   M: (black) 12023656   L: (black) 12023658
S: (white) 12023754   M: (white) 12023756   L: (white) 12023758
S: 53527454   M/L: 53527457
S: (black) 78563554   M/L: (black) 78563557
S: (white) 10134054   M/L: (white) 10134057
$$10.00
$$10.00
$$ 3.50
$$ 4.00
$$ 2.50
78839301
$$ 3.00
53527501
$$ 5.00
S/M: 78374919   L: 78374921
$$ 5.00
S: 78836255   L: 78836258 $$ 10.00
S: 10832254   M/L: 10832257
$$4,00
4x4 Disks
Straps
1X2 Toe Strap - All Models + M4 Toolfree
1X2 Toe Adjuster - All S and SP Models (black)
1X2 Toe Adjuster - All SPX, Force, Grace & Relay Models (black)
1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Relay and Slasher models (black)
1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Force and Grace models (white)
1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06- (black)
S/M: 78837054   L: 78837057 $$ 7.00
$$2.00
S/M: (black) 12023855   L: (black) 12023858
1X2 Narrow Toe Sawblade 19 mm + Holding fast fit pin: All models with narrow buckle 10+
$$2.00
S/M: (white) 12024055   L: (white) 12024058
S/M: (black) 78837155   L: (black) 78837158 $$ 12.00
1X2 Toe Sawblade 24 mm + Holding fast fit: All Models 09- except SP models. (black)
S/M: (white) 10134155   L: (white) 10134158 $$ 2.50
1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06+ (black)
1X2 Alu TOE Buckle All Models 09-
78855301 $$ 25.00
1X2 Alu ANKLE Buckle All Models 09-
78836901 $$ 28.00
TOE ratchet viper for sawblade 19 mm
1X2
width All Models 10+
12024101
1X2 ANKLE buckle viper & screw All Models 10+
1X2
Ankle Strap All Relay Models (black)
L+R
1X2
Ankle Strap All Relay Models (white)
L+R
1X2
Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (black)
L+R
1X2
Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (white)
L+R
1X2 Cored Out Ankle Strap
L+R All models except Relay.
1X2 Ankle Sawblade + Ring + Toothed Nut M5 All Models
$$7.00
12024301
$$7.00
145 mm / S/M: 99494055  
165 mm / L: 78560054
145 mm / S/M: 99494155  
165 mm / L: 78838755
165 mm / S: 78560054  
185 mm / M/L: 78560057
165 mm / S: 78838755  
185 mm / M/L: 78838758
(black) 165 mm / S: 12024455  
(black) 185 mm / M/L: 12024458
(white) 165 mm / S: 12024555  
(white) 185 mm / M/L: 12024558
(black) 78839201
(white) 10131401
$$ 25.00
$$ 33.00
$$ 25.00
$$ 40.00
$$ 33.00
$$ 33.00
$$ 40.00
$$ 40.00
$$10.00
$$10.00
$$10.00
$$10.00
$$ 4.00
$$ 2.50
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 81
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Snowboard Bindings > 82
1X2 Ankle Adjustment Kit Ring + Toolfree Adjuster M4 + Tooth Nut All models
(black) 12024601
(white) 12024701
$$2.50
$$2.50
1X2 Aesthetic Strap Washer + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw outside
(white) 78839101
$$ 3.00
1X2 Aesthetic Strap Nut + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw inside
99493801
$$ 4.00
Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Toe/Ankle) All SP models
1X4
Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Ankle) All SPX models
889905
88999701
$$ 5.00
$$ 6.00
1X4 Strap Kit (screw + nut) - (Ankle) All Force & Grace models .
78836801
$$ 6.00
Spoilers • Highback
1X2 Highback Rotation Screw: All Relay models
78839401
$$ 3.00
1X2 Toolfree FWL Adjuster: All models (grey)
78837501
$$ 7.00
1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All W models except Relay (white)
1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All models except Relay
S/M: 78839755 $$ 16.50
S/M: 78839855   L: 78839858 $$ 13.00
$$ 5.00
1X2 FWL Adjuster: Only Force model (grey)
99493901
1X2 FWL Adjuster: All models 06- except Force & Relay (black)
78857701
$$ 6.00
1X2 Length Base Adjustment Kit: All Force & Grace models (black)
78858001
$$ 6.00
Rental • Speedfit / Fastec
1X2 Disk: Speedfit & Fastec models
1X8 Screw 4X4 M6X20: Speedfit & Fastec models
78333801 Aftermarket $$ 30.00
78620501
$$ 4.00
Rental • Speedfit
1X2 Ankle Strap
78697201 $$ 22.00
$$10.00
1X2 Aluminum Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8
12025801
1X2 Plastic Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8
78619001
$$ 8.00
1X2 Quick cricket: Tool free ankle strap adjustment
78619101
$$ 8.00
1X2 TOE: Sawblade Fast Fit Tooth Straps
9,5 mm hole: 78619201
$$ 4.00
1X2 ANKLE: Sawblade straps for bolt gard 05+
9,5 mm hole: 78619301
$$ 4.00
1X2 Holding Fast Fit: Toestrap snap support easy base
78619401
$$ 4.00
1X2 Toestrap L/XL . (S/M couper 1 trou pour petite taille)
78619559 $$ 15.00
1X2 Heelcup lever
78620601
$$ 4.00
1X4 Highback screw + bush + nut M6 .
78620701
$$ 4.00
1X2 Forward lean screw + washer + savenut M5 X 10
78620901
$$ 4.00
1X1 Highback + FWL adjuster + screw 10-
S/M: 78621101 $$ 16.00
L/XL, S/M: 12026601
$$7.00
S/M: 78621301
$$ 6.00
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10-
L/XL: 78621401
$$ 6.00
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10-
L/XL, S/M: 12026901
$$2.00
1X1 Highback Cored Out + FWL adjuster + screw 10+
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10-
1X2
Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws
L&R
78840001 $$ 20.00
1X6 Plug for base plate
12027401
$$7.00
S/M: 10834655   M/L: 10834658  
$$4,00
1X2
Kit Ankle strap Fastec
L+R
10835401
$$15,00
1X2 Kit Toe strap Fastec
10835501
$$15,00
Toe strap adjuster
10835601
$$4,00
Ankle strap adjuster ( special nut, screw M5x8, safety washer,connection nut)
10835701
$$4,00
ARS Autorelease buckles KIT ( M5x8 screw ,Buckle cam, Nut M5, safety washer)
10835801
$$10,00
S/M M/L: 10835955   L/XL: 10835957  
$$20,00
1X2
Front Pad + Screws
L+R
Rental • Fastec
1X2
L+R
1X2
L+R
1X2
L+R
1X2
L+R
Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 82
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Snowboard Bindings > 83
SNOWBOARD BOOTS
Liners
1X2
FULL CUSTOM FIT Pro All Models Except Talapus & F models
1X2
CUSTOM FIT All Models Except Talapus & F models
23.0‑23.5: 78835921   24.0‑24.5: 78835923   25.0‑25.5: 78835925  
26.0‑26.5: 78835928   27.0‑27.5: 78835930   28.0‑28.5: 78835932   $$ 122.00
29.0‑29.5: 78835935   30.0‑30.5: 78835937
23.0‑23.5: 78836021   24.0‑24.5: 78836023   25.0‑25.5: 78836025  
26.0‑26.5: 78836028   27.0‑27.5: 78836030   28.0‑28.5: 78836032   $$ 74.00
29.0‑29.5: 78836035   30.0‑30.5: 78836037
Inner Soles
1X2 All models except Talapus
23.0: 78611721   23.5: 78611722   24.0: 78611723   24.5: 78611724  
25.0: 78611725   25.5: 78611726   26.0: 78611728   26.5: 78611729   $$ 11.00
27.0: 78611730   27.5: 78611731   28.0: 78611732   28.5: 78611733  
29.0: 78611735   29.5: 78611736   30.0: 78611737   30.5: 78611738
Laces
1X2 Power Lace handle (All models) with Power Lace
78396101
$$ 8.00
1X2 Lace Pulley (All models) with SPL lace
10836201
$$3,00
1X2 Combo closed + lace: for SPL models only
10836101
$$2,00
1X2 Minicombo Main Part 09- All models except Kamooks and Talapus
99494501
$$ 7.00
1X2 Minicombo Main Part 10+ All models except Kamooks and Talapus
12038601
$$2.00
1X2 Power Lace Locker (All models)
78396201
$$ 5.00
1X2 LINER Kevlar Lace Locker (All models)
78396301
$$ 5.00
1X4 Open Top Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Lace hook or Top Block
78396501
$$ 5.00
1X4 Closed Bottom Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Eyestack Block
78396601
$$ 5.00
1X2 Open Eyestay block (Fusion models only)
19578501
$$ 4.00
1X2 Closed Eyestay block (Fusion models only)
19578601
$$ 4.00
1X8 Open Top Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+
10837301
$$4,00
1X4 Closed Eyestay / Bottom Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+
10837101
$$4,00
10837401
$$2,00
(black) 25.5: 78396026 28.5: 78396733 31.5: 78396841  
(black) 225 cm / 31.5: 12038941  
(white) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039041
(dark brown) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039141  
(red) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039241  
$$2.00
$$2.00
$$2.00
$$2.00
$$2.00
1X2 Metal hook
1X2 Lace (all Power Lace models)
1X1 (All models) Liner kevlar lace (black)
25 m  78396401 $$ 17.00
1X2 Big Speed Lace Locker + Lace
78836101 $$ 10.00
1X2 Speed Lace Locker + Lace
88935501
$$ 2.50
1X2 New combo («tongue lace locker with springs»)
99494701
$$ 4.00
1X2 BOA coiler reel • O6 (B521) All BOA models 06-
19578701 $$ 40.00
1X2 BOA coiler reel • H2 (B779B) All BOA models 10+
1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models
1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models 10+
12038701
$$18.00
130 cm / 22.0‑26.5: 19578801   $$ 14.00
$$4.00
140 cm / 27.0‑31.5: 12039301
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 83
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Spare Parts
Footwear > 84
FOOTWEAR
Laces
1,60 m: 86065401   1,80 m: 86065501  
2,00 m: 86065601  
1,00 m: 86065101  
(black) 1,30 m: 86065201   (grey) 1,30 m: 86065301
(black): 86065701  
(grey): 86065801
(black): 12012301  
(grey): 12012401
$$ 6.00
$$ 6.00
$$ 6.00
$$ 6.00
$$ 6.00
$$ 8.00
$$4.50
$$4.50
1X10 Plastic (black)
86067301
$$ 6.00
1X10 Lace Hook
86067401
$$ 8.00
1X2 Mountain Lace (grey)
1X2
Junior lace (black)
Footwear lace
1X2 Quick Lace Kit
1X2 Quick Lace Small Kit
Poulies • Lace Hooks & Loops
Inner Soles
1X2 EVA insoles decut & perforated
1X2 Molded Felt Sockliner
3,5/4: 86065921   4,5/5: 86065923   5,5/6: 86065925   6,5/7: 86065927  
7,5/8: 86065929   8,5/9: 86065931   9,5/10: 86065933   10,5/11: 86065935   $$ 10.00
11,5/12: 86065937   12,5/13: 86065939
3,5: 86068220   4,0: 86068221   4,5: 86068222   5,0: 86068223   5,5: 86068224  
6,0: 86068225   6,5: 86068226   7,0: 86068227   7,5: 86068228   8,0: 86068229  
8,5: 86068230   9,0: 86068231   9,5: 86068232   10,0: 86068233   10,5: 86068234   $$ 14.00
11,0: 86068235   11,5: 86068236   12,0: 86068237   12,5: 86068238  
13,0: 86068239
(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)
SPM 11 EN.indb 84
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Warranty
Warranty > 85
Salomon Retail Binding Limited Warranty
Salomon Retail Alpine Bindings are covered under warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing for a period of five years from their date of purchase to the
original customer. In the absence of proof-of-purchase, this warranty period will be five years from date of manufacture of the product as indicated by production code. This
warranty only covers the defective component, not the full pair or set, i.e., left toe piece, brake, right heel, etc. Abuse and normal wear are not covered by this warranty.
Replacement Procedures
Step One. Verify by customer receipt or production code that the defective
component is under warranty. (Warranty claims should be handled through
Authorized Dealers to ensure speed and accuracy of product replacement.
Please do not refer a customer directly to Salomon.)
Step Two: Call customer service for return authorization number.
(There is no longer an express warranty form.)
Step Three: Return the defective set to Salomon with the return authorization
number clearly printed on the outside of the package. Return the entire set,
unless otherwise instructed by customer service.
Ship the package freight pre-paid to:
USACanada
Salomon Service Center
Salomon Canada Sports
Building 5X, Bay 6
Division of Amer Sports Canada Inc.
710 West Amidan Drive
3545 Thimens Blvd.
Ogden, UT 84404
Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4R 1V5
Upon a dealer’s request to Customer Service, a warranty replace­ment component can be shipped in advance to the dealer before it is inspected at Salomon’s
Service Center. Salomon will invoice the dealer for the replacement component
and issue a credit when the defective component is received and verified. If the
defective compo­nent exchanged for the advance replacement is not received
within 45 days from the issue of the Return Authorization Number, or proves
not to be defective, no credit will be issued for the replacement product.
Step Four: Salomon will ship the replacement product to the dealer, surface
freight pre-paid, after verification of the defect.
Mechanical Inspection Failures
Normal wear is expected with the use of a product. Should a component fail a
mechanical inspection (measured release values that fall outside the “In-Use
Range”) within its warranty period, include the following information with the
returned component.
• Description of inspection that the component failed.
• Brand of test device and date of most recent calibration.
• Skier Code and visual indicator setting.
• Boot brand, model and sole length.
• All measured release values and name of the technician.
Every Salomon binding component is precision tested to assure its accuracy
during manufacture. It is extremely rare that a component would be out of
calibration unless there is visible damage. All bindings returned due to mechanical testing failures are inspected. No replacement product will be issued
unless all required information is included with the product.
Product Age Verification
Verification that the product is within the warranty period can be made in
the following two ways:
1.Customer receipt indicating product was purchased within the last five years.
2.Component production code* indicating manufacture of product within last five
years.
Note
*All Salomon binding components are stamped with a two- or three-digit code upon their
final production to indicate month and year of production. Normally, codes are a letter
followed by a number, with the letter indicating month of produc­tion. Each number corresponds to the actual year of production, i.e., 3 would indicate 2003, 4 would indicate
2004, etc. To simplify the warranty process, product age is determined by the year of
production only. Retail bindings with a production code indicating that the bindings were
manufac­tured in 2006 (e.g., A6, M6) will be warranted until the end of the 2010/2011 ski
season. Production codes are stamped in various places on all binding components.
Salomon Service Center
In the event an unusual situation is encountered or a technical question arises
please call the Salomon Service Center at:
USA 1-800-654-2668
CAN 1-800-361-3398 ext. 1142
Salomon Alpine Skis, Snowblade & Boot Warranty
Salomon alpine skis, Snowblade and
boots are warranted for a period of
2 years from date of original purchase.
To determine the period covered by the
warranty, the customer has to show the
sales receipt.
The Salomon Snowblade warranty can
only function if the customer presents
the Snowblade unit to the dealer as it
was sold (ski and binding). If not, the
warranty cannot be honored.
Salomon Pilot set warranty
The skis are covered for 2 years from
the date of original purchase.
The bindings are covered by a 5 years
warranty from the date of original
purchase.
Ski: if there is a problem that is
covered by the warranty (breakage,
pulled edge…) that occurs during the
warranty period (2 years), Salomon will replace either the Ski + Binding unit
or the Ski Only at our discretion.
Binding: if there is a problem that
is covered by the Salomon warranty
(breakage, binding pulled-out…) that
occurs during the warranty period
(5 years), Salomon will replace the
Binding Only, except if the damage concerns the brake or the AFD plate. In this
case, Salomon will replace the defective part(s) with spare parts.
Salomon’s only liability as regards this
warranty will be to repair or replace the
defective product with a model or pair
within the limits of available stock.
These warranties cover skis, Snowblade,
bindings against manufacturing defects.
However, these warranties do not
cover damage resulting from transport,
handling, storage, failure by the cli-
ent to follow the instructions for use,
modification of the product or normal
wear and tear.
In case of damage to a product caused
by an accident or misuse, please consult
Salomon Customer Service for advice
on possible repair or replacement.
Ski problems not covered by the warranty
Problems Bent skis Top surface Tip protector Tail protector Running surface Binding pull-out Pulled edge Solutions
Contact subsidiary for more information
Can be repaired
Can be repaired with spare parts
Cannot be repaired
Can be repaired
Can be repaired with inserts
Can be repaired
For all other problems, contact the subsidiary Customer Service.
Salomon Helmet & Alpine Pole Warranty
Salomon helmets and poles are guaranteed against defects in materials and
manufacturing for a period of one year
from their date of purchase*.
This warranty only covers the defective
compo­nents. Claims arising from improper storage of product, modification,
abuse and normal wear are not covered
SPM 11 EN.indb 85
by this warranty. This warranty applies
only to products sold by an Authorized
Salomon Dealer. For warranty service,
present the defective helmet with the
original sales receipt to your nearest
Authorized Salomon Dealer.
* This warranty may vary in some
countries.
Salomon’s only liability regarding this
warranty will be to repair or replace the
defective product with a model in an
available version.
Warning:
The Salomon helmets are designed only
for the following activities: ski, snowboard and skiboard (Snowblade®).
They are not designed to be used on
motorbikes or for other sports, mechanical or not.
The Alpine Salomon poles are designed
for cross­country or downhill skiing only,
except for the adjustable poles that can
be used for downhill skiing and hiking.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave.
Ogden, UT 84401 U.S.A.
1 (800) 225-6850
www.salomoncertification.com
Salomon Canada Sports
2700 14th Ave Unit 1-4
Markham, On L3R 0J1
www.salomonhookup.ca
SalomonSports.com
Printed in Canada
SPM 11 EN.indb 86
10/14/10 4:29 PM